SYSMAC CVM1D Duplex System Programmable Controllers Installation Guide

SYSMAC CVM1D Duplex System Programmable Controllers Installation Guide
SYSMAC CVM1D
Duplex System
Programmable Controllers
Installation Guide
Produced July 2000
6487
SYSMAC CVM1/CV/CVM1D Series
Memory Cards Built into CPU Units
Models: HMC-ES251/551 (SRAM)
Information on Replacing Discontinued Products
OMRON Corporation
Applicable Manuals
W195
W202
W350
W351
Thank you for your continued support of OMRON and OMRON products.
Production of the HMC-ES251/551 Memory Cards built into CVM1/CV/CVM1D-series CPU Units has been
terminated as of February 2004. Please use the HMC-ES252/552 Memory Cards as replacement products.
Differences in Specifications
The appearance (color) and life expectance of the replacement products have changed, but the basic
specifications as Memory Cards are the same.
Item
Memory type
Memory capacity
File capacity
Battery life
Replacement
Battery
Appearance (color)
Discontinued products
HMC-ES251
HMC-ES551
Replacement products
HMC-ES252
HMC-ES552
SRAM
256 KB
512 KB
1 year
0.5 years
256 KB
512 KB
112 files
5 years
HMC-BAT01
or HMC-BAT02 (to be marketed soon)
Yellow
HMC-BAT01
Orange
Replacing the Battery in
HMC-ES252/552 Memory Cards
The Battery replacement procedure for the
HMC-ES252/552 is basically the same as that
for the HMC-ES251/551. The shape of the
Battery holder, however, is different, so step 3,
below, is different.
1. If the Memory Card power indicator (M/C ON)
is lit, press the Memory Card power switch to
turn OFF the indicator. If the indicator is
already not lit, press the switch so that the
indicator is lit for at least 10 s and then press
the switch again to turn OFF the indicator.
2. After confirming that the Memory Card power
indicator is not lit, press Memory Card
ejection button and remove the Memory Card
from the CPU Unit.
Complete Battery replacement (steps 3 to 5,
below) within one minute. If more than one
minute elapses, memory may be lost.
3. Slide the lock knob on the battery holder to
the left to release the lock and remove the
holder from the Memory Card.
Battery holder
Lock knob
4. Remove the old Battery from the battery
holder and insert a new Battery.
Insert the battery with
the positive terminal
facing up.
Battery
Battery
holder
5. Insert the battery holder into the Memory
Card. Be sure the battery holder is inserted
all the way to the back, press in on the
battery holder so that it does not come out,
and slide the lock knob to the right to lock the
battery holder in place. Be sure that the
battery holder cannot be pulled output after
completing this step.
6. Insert the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
6487
SYSMAC CVM1D PLCs
Supplemental Information
Applicable Manual
W350-E1-02
OMRON Corporation
Thank you for your continued support of OMRON and OMRON products.
The following supplemental information applies to SYSMAC CVM1D PLCs. Please use this information in
addition to the SYSMAC CVM1D Duplex System Installation Guide (Cat. No. W350-E1-02).
Use the following procedure to mount the Duplex Unit to the CPU Backplane.
(1) Align the CVM1D-DPL01 Duplex Unit properly with the bus connectors on the CPU Backplane, and then firmly
press the Duplex Unit onto the Backplane until it clicks into place. The Duplex Unit uses a multi-pole
connector with a locking mechanism, and must be pressed more firmly than other SYSMAC Units.
(2) Confirm that the Duplex Unit is properly mounted by trying to lift it gently off the Backplane. If the Duplex Unit
separates from Backplane, then the connection is not proper. Repeat the procedure from step 1.
(3) Tighten the mounting screws (two) at the top and bottom of the Duplex Unit securely using a Phillips
screwdriver to a maximum tightening torque of 0.9 N⋅m.
DPL Unit
Press firmly here.
Screw
Screw
Backplane
No. 6182
OMRON Corporation
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
1
No. 6182
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
2
No. 6182
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
3
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
! WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
! Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
!
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1, 2, 3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Role of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV-series Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Networks and Remote I/O Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatibility with CVM1, C-series, and CV-series Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 2
System Configuration and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Mounting Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU and I/O Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Unit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compliance with EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
System Startup and Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
System Startup Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Startup of the Simplex System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparations for Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 5
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
Consumable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Unit Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages and Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Processing and Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendices
A Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the hardware and installation of the CVM1D Duplex System Programmable Controllers and includes the sections described below.
Please read this and all related manuals carefully and be sure you understand the information provide
before attempting to operate or program a CVM1D Duplex System Programmable Controller. The main
manuals required for operation are listed below. A list of other related manuals is provided at the end of
Section 1 Introduction.
Manual
Contents
Cat. No.
CVM1D Duplex System PC Installation Guide
Describes the system configuration,
specifications, installation, and wiring.
W350
CVM1D Duplex System PC Operation Manual
Describes ladder-diagram programming and
programming instructions.
W351
CVM1-PRS21-V1E Programming Console
Operation Manual
Describes Programming Console operations.
W222
CVM1/CV-series PCs Operation Manual:
Host Link
Describes communications methods with host
computers.
W205
Section 1 provides general information about Programmable Controllers and how they fit into a Control
System. It also lists the C-series, CVM1, and CV-series products that can be used with the CVM1D PCs
and operation manuals available for various OMRON products. Finally, this section introduces Systems
that can be used to create networks and enable remote I/O, and provides a list of manuals for related
products
Section 2 provides information about the types of system configuration in which the CVM1D PCs can be
used and the individual Units that make up these configuration. Refer to Appendix A Standard Models for
a list of OMRON products that can be used in CVM1D PC Systems.
Section 3 describes how to assemble, mount, and wire a PC starting with a Backplane and use all the
Units discussed in the previous section. Technical specifications and dimensions are provided in Appendix B Specifications.
Section 4 describes procedures for the starting up the system and performing trial operation.
Section 5 describes the procedures necessary for periodic inspection and maintenance.
Section 6 describes the self-diagnostic functions of the PC and provides troubleshooting techniques and
error corrections.
The Appendices provide a list of standard product model numbers and specifications.
! WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
ix
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Controller. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a
PC system.
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
3
Safety Precautions
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual
close at hand for reference during operation.
! WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can
directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PC System to the above-mentioned
applications.
3
Safety Precautions
! WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing so
may result in electric shock.
! WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals while the power is being supplied. Doing so
may result in electric shock.
! WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair. or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so
may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
! WARNING There is a lithium battery built into the SRAM Memory Cards. Do not short the
positive and negative terminals of the battery, charge the battery, attempt to take
it apart, subject it to pressures that would deform it, incinerate it, or otherwise
mistreat it. Doing any of these could cause the battery to erupt, ignite, or leak.
! WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, in order to ensure safety in the system
if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor
affecting the PC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
xii
5
Application Precautions
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any
error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
• The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the
output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for
such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in
the system.
• When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PC) is overloaded or
short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned
OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must
be provided to ensure safety in the system.
! Caution
4
Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in burning
or malfunction.
Operating Environment Precautions
! Caution
Do not operate the control system in the following places:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in
the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
! Caution
Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the
following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
! Caution
5
The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to
malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System. Be
sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PC System.
! WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always ground the system to 100 Ω or less when installing the Units to protect
against electric shock.
xiii
Application Precautions
5
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric
shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units,
Memory Cassettes, or any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting or wiring the cables.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
! Caution
Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the
PC or the system, or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these precautions.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external circuits
(i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the customer.
• Always use the power supply voltage specified in the operation manuals. An
incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated
voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the
power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may
result in burning.
• Do not mount a CVM1D Power Supply Unit in a CVM1 or CV-series PC. Doing
so may result in burning or malfunction.
• Do not mount a CVM1 or CV-series Power Supply Unit on a Duplex CVM1D
PC. Doing so may result in unexpected stoppage of the PC.
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage.
Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of the
maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning.
• Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage
tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result in burning.
• Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual. Improper installation of the Unit may result in malfunction.
• Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector
screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals. Incorrect
tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may result in malfunction.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to
terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning.
• Double-check all the wiring before turning on the power supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount the Unit only after checking the terminal block completely.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, EM Units, expansion cables, and other items
with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking may result in malfunction.
xiv
6
Conformance to EC Directives
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the
Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of
the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PC.
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit. Doing
either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables. Doing so may break the cables.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is correct.
Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching the Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or
damage.
6
Conformance to EC Directives
The CVM1D PCs conform to EMC and Low Voltage Directives as follows:
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC
standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be confirmed by the
customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the
equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed. The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices and the
overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61131-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):
EN50081-2
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75 to
1,500 VDC meet the required safety standards for the PC (EN61131-2).
The CVM1D, CVM1, and CV-series PCs that comply with EC Directives must be
installed as follows:
1, 2, 3...
1. The CVM1D, CVM1, and CV-series PCs are designed for installation inside
control panels. All PCs must be securely grounded within control panels.
2. Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supplies
used for the communications power supply and I/O power supplies.
3. The CVM1D, CVM1, and CV-series PCs that comply with EC Directives also
conform to the Common Emission Standard (EN50081-2). Radiated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used, other devices connected to the control
panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the
overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives.
xv
Conformance to EC Directives
6
Precautions Regarding Relay Output Switching:
Noise generated by the switching of relay outputs may exceed the standards of
the Common Emission Standard (EN50081-2). In this case, take the necessary
countermeasures to reduce the emissions, such as connecting a surge suppressor or shielding the PC. Some methods of reducing emissions are shown
below.
Countermeasures are required when the load switching frequency of the overall
PC exceeds 5 times/minute. Refer to 3-8 Conformance to EC Directives for examples of circuits that can be used to reduce noise generated by switching.
xvi
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section provides general information about Programmable Controllers and how they fit into a Control System. It also
lists the C-series, CVM1, and CV-series products that can be used with the CVM1D PCs and operation manuals available for
various OMRON products. Finally, this section introduces Systems that can be used to create networks and enable remote I/O,
and provides a list of manuals for related products.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Role of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV-series Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1 Duplex System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-2 Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-3 Power Supply Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-4 CVM1D Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Networks and Remote I/O Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatibility with CVM1, C-series, and CV-series Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Section
The Role of the PC
1-1
1-2
Control Systems
A Control System is the electronic equipment needed to control a particular process. It may include everything from a process control computer, to the factory
computer, down through the PCs, and then on down through the network to the
I/O devices: control components like the switches, stepping motors, solenoids,
and sensors which monitor and control mechanical operations.
Process Control Computer
Factory Computer
PCs
PC
PC
PC
I/O devices
A Control System can involve very large applications where many different models of PC are networked together or it could be an application as small as a single
PC controlling a number of output devices.
1-2
The Role of the PC
The PC is the part of the Control System that directly controls the manufacturing
process. According to the program stored in its memory, the PC accepts data
from the input devices connected to it and uses this data to monitor the controlled system. When the program calls for some action to take place, the PC
sends data to the output devices connected to it to cause that action to take
place. The PC may be used to control a simple, repetitive task, or it may be connected to other PCs or to a host computer in order to integrate the control of a
complex process.
2
Section
The Role of the PC
1-2
1-2-1 Input Devices
PCs can receive inputs from either automated or manual devices. The PC could
receive data from the user via a pushbutton switch, keyboard, or similar device.
Automated inputs could come from a variety of devices: micro-switches, timers,
encoders, photoelectric sensors, and so on. Some devices, like the limit switch
shown below, turn ON or OFF when the equipment actually makes contact with
them. Other devices, like the photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor shown
below, use other means, such as light or inductance, in order to get information
about the equipment being monitored.
Photoelectric Sensor
Proximity Sensor
Limit Switch
1-2-2 Output Devices
A PC can output to a myriad of devices for use in automated control. Almost anything that you can think of could be controlled by a PC. Some of the most common devices are motors, solenoids, servomotors, stepping motors, valves,
switches, indicator lights, buzzers, and alarms. Some of these output devices,
such as the motors, solenoids, servomotors, stepping motors, and valves, affect
the controlled system directly. Others, such as the indicator lights, buzzers, and
alarms, provide outputs to notify personnel operating or monitoring the system.
Solenoid
Servomotor
Stepping Motor
3
Section
PC Operation
1-3
1-3
PC Operation
PCs operate by monitoring input signals and providing output signals. When
changes are detected in input signals, the PC reacts through the user-programmed internal logic to produce output signals. The PC continually executes
the program in its memory to achieve this control.
Block Diagram of PC
Power Supply
Memory
Signals
from
switches,
sensors,
etc.
Input
CPU
Output
Signals to
Solenoids,
motors,
etc.
Programming
Device
A program for your applications must be designed and stored in the PC. This
program is then executed as part of the cycle of internal operations of the PC.
Execution Cycle
When a PC operates, i.e., when it executes its program to control an external
system, a series of operations are performed inside the PC. These internal operations can be broadly classified into the following four categories. Refer to the
CVM1D Operation Manual for details.
1, 2, 3...
1. Common (or overseeing) processes, such as watchdog timer operation and
testing the program memory.
2. Data input and output.
3. Program execution.
4. Programming Device servicing.
Cycle Time
The total time required for a PC to perform all these internal operations is called
the cycle time.
Timing is one of the most important factors in designing a Control System. For
accurate operations, it is necessary to have answers to such questions as these:
• How long does it take for the PC to execute all the instructions in its memory?
• How long does it take for the PC to produce a control output in response to a
given input signal?
4
Section
CV-series Manuals
1-4
The cycle time of the PC can be automatically calculated and monitored, but it is
necessary to have an understanding of the timing relationships within the PC for
effective System design and programming. Refer to the CVM1D Operation Manual for details on internal PC processing and to the SSS Operation Manuals for
details on monitoring the cycle time.
1-4
CV-series Manuals
The following manuals are available for the various products that can be used in
a CVM1D system. Catalog number suffixes have been omitted; be sure you
have the most recent version for your region.
Product
CV-series PCs
Manual
Cat. No.
CV-series PCs Installation Guide
W195
CV-series PCs Operation Manual: SFC
W194
CV-series PCs Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams
W202
CV-series PCs Operation Manual: Host Link System,
CV500-LK201 Host Link Unit
W205
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: Basics
W247
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 PCs
W249
Programming Console
CVM1-PRS21-E Programming Console Operation Manual
W222
SYSMAC NET Link System
SYSMAC NET Link System Manual
W213
SYSMAC LINK System
SYSMAC LINK System Manual
W212
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System Manual
W204
CV-series Ethernet Unit
CV-series Ethernet System Manual
W242
BASIC Unit
BASIC Unit Reference Manual
W207
BASIC Unit Operation Manual
W206
Temperature Controller Data Link Unit
Personal Computer Unit Operation Manual
Personal Computer Unit Technical Manual
Motion Control Unit Operation Manual: Introduction
Motion Control Unit Operation Manual: Details
CV500-TDL21 Temperature Controller Data Link Unit
W251
W252
W254
W255
W244
Memory Card Writer
CV500-MCW01-E Memory Card Writer Operation Manual
W214
Optical Fiber Cable
Optical Fiber Cable Installation Guide
W156
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)
Personal Computer Unit
Motion Control Unit
5
Section
Features
1-5
1-5
Features
The SYSMAC CVM1D Duplex System is a high-speed, highly reliable ladderprogram PC that can operate 24 hours/day.
Redundant CPU Units
The redundant CPU Units allow continuous, 24-hour/day PC operation. The
CVM1D-CPU21 CPU Unit was developed specifically for the duplex system and
based on the CVM1-CPU21-V2 CPU Unit, so the duplex CPU Unit inherits the
superior performance of the CVM1 and CV-series PCs.
Both Duplex and Simplex
Operation are Supported
The PC can operate in duplex mode or simplex mode depending on the setting
of the Duplex/Simplex Mode Switch on the front of the Duplex Unit.
Redundant Power Supply
Units
Redundant Power Supply Units have been added to CPU Racks, Expansion
CPU Racks, and Expansion I/O Racks. The two Units supply power to the rack in
parallel. Even if one of the Power Supply Units breaks down, the PC can continue operating normally and the faulty Unit can be replaced without interruption.
Backplanes that accommodate two Power Supply Units must be used for the
Expansion CPU Racks and Expansion I/O Racks in order to take advantage of
the redundant power supply function.
Online I/O Unit
Replacement
When an error occurs in an I/O Unit, the faulty Unit can be replaced without turning off the power to the whole system. Use the duplex system’s
CVM1-PRS21-EV1 Programming Console to replace an I/O Unit online.
Compatible with C-series
and CV-series Units
C500 I/O Units and Special I/O Units as well as CV-series CPU Bus Units can be
used with CVM1D PCs.
1-5-1 Duplex System Operation
A CVM1D Duplex System can be assembled with redundant CPU Units and
Power Supply Units to allow continuous operation.
CVM1D Duplex System
Configuration
A CVM1D can be configured to run in duplex mode with two CPU Units operating
in parallel or in simplex mode with one CPU Unit operating independently.
• Duplex (DPL) System:
Both CPU Units and Power Supply Units are redundant.
• Simplex (SPL) System:
One CPU Unit is used, but Power Supply Units are redundant.
Duplex (DPL) System
6
A CVM1D CPU Backplane is equipped with two CPU Units, a Duplex Unit, and
two Power Supply Units.
Section
Features
1-5
When the PC is operating in duplex mode, the two CPU Units operate the same
program and one CPU Unit (the active CPU Unit) controls the system while the
other (the standby CPU Unit) operates in parallel. If an error occurs in the one of
the CPU Units, operation continues with the other CPU Unit and the faulty CPU
Unit can be replaced without stopping the PC.
Simplex (SPL) System
A CVM1D CPU Backplane is equipped with a CPU Unit, a Duplex Unit, and two
Power Supply Units.
The Duplex Unit is primarily needed to operate the duplex system, but it performs other functions such as I/O bus switching so the Duplex Unit is also required in a simplex system.
Two Power Supply Units are used, so the PC can continue operating with one
Power Supply Unit if the other breaks down. The faulty Unit can be replaced
without stopping operation.
1-5-2 Duplex Unit
The Duplex Unit monitors errors in the two CPU Units and switches the CPU
bus, I/O bus, and Peripheral bus to the standby CPU Unit if an error occurs in the
active CPU Unit.
Operation of the CVM1D
Duplex System
When the PC is operating as a duplex system, the two CPU Units perform different roles, one is the active CPU Unit and the other is the standby CPU Unit.
CPU Unit
Active CPU Unit
Standby CPU Unit
Operation
Executes the program and controls I/O Units, Special I/O
Units, and CPU Bus Units.
Executes the same program as the active CPU Unit but does
not control I/O.
• The “active CPU Unit” is determined at the start of duplex mode operation by
the setting on the Duplex Unit’s Active CPU Switch.
• If an error occurs in the active CPU Unit during operation, operation is switched
automatically to the standby CPU Unit which becomes the active CPU Unit.
• The PC can be returned to duplex mode operation by replacing or repairing the
CPU Unit in which the error occurred.
7
Section
Features
1-5
1-5-3 Power Supply Redundancy
When two Power Supply Units are mounted, the Backplane’s 5-VDC power is
supplied simultaneously from the two Power Supply Units.
If one of the Power Supply Units breaks down, its load will be picked up by the
other Power Supply Unit. Be sure that the current consumption of all of the Units
mounted in the Backplane can be supplied by either one of the Power Supply
Units. If one of the Power Supply Units breaks down and the capacity of the other
Unit is insufficient, the second Unit will overload and the system will shutdown.
The Power Supply Units’ error status is displayed on Rack’s I/O Control Unit or
I/O Interface Unit (ICjjj/IIjjj). The error status is also indicated in the
Power Supply Unit OFF/Error Flags in A397 and A398.
1-5-4 CVM1D Limitations
The performance of CVM1D CPU Units is comparable to that of the CVM1-CPUEV1, but as part of the conversion to duplex operation several instructions have
been removed and some Units have become incompatible.
Incompatible Units
• C2000-ID216 Interrupt Input Unit
(If the Unit is mounted, it will operate as a normal 8-point Input Unit.)
• C500-ASC03 ASCII Unit
Unusable Instructions
Refer to the CVM1D Operation Manual for more details on the following instructions.
• Immediate-refresh Variations
(Immediate-refreshing variations can be used in simplex mode, but they can
cause improper operation in duplex mode so they should not be used.)
• Interrupt Control Instructions
MSKS(153), CLI(154), and MSKR(155)
• Memory Card instructions
FILR(180), FILW(181), FILP(182), and FLSP(183)
Memory Card Functions
Memory Cards can be installed and used in each CPU Unit, although the Card’s
program and data are not included in duplex synchronization.
I/O Refreshing
Cyclic refreshing is the only method used to refresh the entire I/O area. The I/O
REFRESH instruction (IORF(184)) can be used to refresh specific ranges of I/O
words. Immediate refreshing cannot be used in duplex mode.
Operation of Timers
The precision of the TIM, TIMH(015), and TTIM(120) timers has decreased
slightly because of changes in the refreshing process. Refer to the CVM1D Operation Manual for more details on the precision of timers.
8
Section
Networks and Remote I/O Systems
1-6
1-6
Networks and Remote I/O Systems
Ethernet
D Message communications
S Host computer – PC
S PC – PC, or
Computer – Computer
D FTP server function
S Host computer – PC
S File transfers with
the PC’s Memory Card
Controller Link Units
SYSMAC
LINK Unit
SYSMAC NET
Controller Link
Link Unit
S Easily assemble full-scale networks
(using twisted-pair wiring).
S Supports high-capacity, high-speed, and
reliable data links as well as high-volume
message communications.
S Also supports communications between
PCs and personal computers.
SYSMAC
LINK Unit
SYSMAC LINK
S Two communications methods
(Optical fiber cable)
S Data link function for internode
data links without programming
S Message service function
Ethernet
Ethernet Unit
D Socket service
Transfer large amounts of
data with TCP or UDP protocol.
Controller Link
Support Board
CompoBus/D
Configurator
DeviceNet
(CompoBus/D)
Conforms to multi-vendor DeviceNet standards.
Both Remote I/O and message communications.
S High capacity, flexible Remote I/O
S Message communications support PC–PC
communications, DeviceNet and explicit
messages.
Multifunctional networks can be created.
Many connection methods are supported.
Wide variety of Slaves available:
I/O Terminals, Remote Adapters, Sensor
Terminals, I/O Link Units, Communications
Terminals, and MULTIPLE I/O TERMINALs
SYSMAC
LINK Board
SYSMAC BUS/2
Improved Version of SYSMAC
BUS
S Baud rate of 1.5 Mbps
S Connect Remote I/O Slave
Racks.
Control system
SYSMAC NET Link
S Automatic loopbacks
S Data links
S Message communications with Network
Instructions
Information system
The following diagram shows the communications networks that can be used
with the CVM1D PCs.
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O
S Remote I/O using I/O Units
S Multi-drop or optical fiber connections
S Use Remote I/O Slave Racks,
Optical I/O Units, or I/O Terminals
Mounting an Ethernet Unit allows message (FINS) communications between
the PC and other PCs or host computers on the Ethernet. It is also possible to
transfer data to and from the Memory Card installed in the CPU Unit by issuing
an FTP command to the PC from a host computer on the Ethernet. In addition, all
kinds of data can be transferred by UDP or TCP protocol.
9
Section
Networks and Remote I/O Systems
1-6
These functions can improve the interconnection with information systems and
networks.
Host computer
FTP command
Ethernet
FINS
FINS
Ethernet Unit
Controller Link
Ethernet Unit
The Controller Link is the main FA network of OMRON PCs; it can provide data
links between PCs (automatic data sharing independent of the program) as well
as message (FINS) communications between PCs (data transfers and control
when required). A Controller Link network can be connected with twisted-pair
wiring. Data links and message communications between PCs and computers
are also supported.
Data links can share large volumes of data and the shared data areas can be
allocated freely. Message (FINS) communications can also transfer large volumes of data.
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link
Support Board
Controller Link Unit
Message
Controller Link
Arbitrary
data area
allocation
Data link
DeviceNet (CompoBus/D)
DeviceNet is a standardized multi-vendor network that can be used simultaneously for control and information transmission. CompoBus/D conforms to the
open field network DeviceNet standards. Remote I/O communications between
the PC and various CompoBus/D Slaves can be achieved by mounting a CompoBus/D Master Unit. Remote I/O communications can handle a large number
of I/O points and provide free allocation. Slaves such as Analog I/O Terminals
are available. In addition, DeviceNet supports message communications between PCs and between the PC and other manufacturers’ DeviceNet devices.
CompoBus/D Master Unit
CompoBus/D Master Unit
Message
Remote I/O
10
Various kinds of
CompoBus/D Slaves
Section
Networks and Remote I/O Systems
1-6
Summary of Communications Networks: Information
Network
Ethernet
Function
Communications
Message
g ((FINS)) communications
PC ↔ Host computer
PC ↔ PC
Memory Card in CPU Unit ↔
Host computer
Devices
Ethernet Unit
FTP server function
PC ↔ Nodes with socket service
(such as Unix-based computers)
Socket service function
Controller Link
PC ↔ Computer directly
y
connected
d to the
h network
k
Message (FINS) communications
Data link (Offsets and automatic
settings can be used.)
Controller Link Support
B d and
Board
dU
Unit
i
RS-232C to
Controller Link
Host computer and PCs in the
network
Host link commands and gateway
functions
RS-232C cable and
Controller Link Unit
Message (FINS) communications
Data link
Message (FINS) communications
Data link
SYSMAC NET Link
S
B
d and
dU
i
Support
Board
Unit
SYSMAC NET Link PC ↔ Computer directly
y
d to the
h network
k
connected
SYSMAC LINK
PC ↔ Computer directly
y
connected
d to the
h network
k
SYSMAC LINK Support
B d and
Board
dU
Unit
i
Summary of Communications Networks: Control
Network
Controller Link
Function
PC ↔ PC
Communications
PC Link
DeviceNet
(CompoBus/D)
DeviceNet
(CompoBus/D)
Devices
Controller Link Unit
Message (FINS) communications
Data link (Offsets and automatic
settings can be used.)
Automatic data link
Open network message (FINS)
communications
PC Link Unit
CompoBus/D Master Unit
and Configurator
PC ↔ Components (Slaves) Open network high-capacity remote
I/O (fixed or arbitrary allocation)
SYSMAC NET Link PC ↔ PC
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
Message (FINS) communications
Data link
Message (FINS) communications
Data link
SYSMAC LINK
CompoBus/D Master Unit
and Configurator
SYSMAC LINK Unit
Communications Specifications
Network
Options
Max.
baud rate
Total
distance
Number
of nodes
Medium
Capacity
Devices
Ethernet
S Message
10 Mbps
2.5 km
---
Coaxial
---
PC ↔ Host
computer or
PC ↔ PC
Controller Link
S Message
S Data link
2 Mbps
500 m
32 max.
Twisted-pair
cable
Data link:
32,000 words
per network
PC ↔ PC or
Computer ↔ PC
PC Link
S Data link
128 Kbps
500 m
32 max.
RS-232C or
RS-422
Data link:
64 words per
network
---
50 Mbps1
100 m
63 max.
Special cable
Remote I/O:
2,048 points
PC ↔ Slave2
DeviceNet
S Message
(CompoBus/D) S Remote I/O
SYSMAC NET
Link
S Message
S Data link
2 Mbps
1 km
126 max.
Optical fiber
Data link:
3,584 words
per network
PC ↔ Host
computer or
PC ↔ PC
SYSMAC
LINK
S Message
S Data link
2 Mbps
1 km
62 max.
Coaxial
Data link:
2,966 words
per network
PC ↔ Host
computer or
PC ↔ PC
SYSMAC
BUS/2
S Remote I/O
1.5 Mbps
See note 3. 4 max.
Wired or
optical fiber
Remote I/O:
128 points
---
Note
1. Communications cycle of approximately 5 ns (128 inputs and 128 outputs).
11
Section
Compatibility with CVM1, C-series, and CV-series Units
1-7
2. Slaves include I/O Terminals, Remote Adapters, Sensor Terminals, CQM1
I/O Link Units, and Analog Output Terminals.
3. For wired systems, the total communications distance can be up to 500 m;
for optical systems it can be up to 10 km and up to 800 m with node connections.
1-7
Compatibility with CVM1, C-series, and CV-series Units
Unit
CPU Rack
C Series
CV Series
CVM1
Duplex
Remarks
CPU Unit
---
---
Yes
CVM1D-CPU21
Power Supply Unit
---
No1
Yes
CVM1D-PA208/PA212
Power Supply Unit
---
Yes
No1
CV500-PS211/221
CVM1-PA208
CPU Backplane supporting
online I/O replacement
---
---
Yes
CVM1D-BC051
I/O Control Unit
---
Yes
---
CV500-IC101/201/301
Duplex Unit
---
---
Yes
CVM1D-DPL01
-----
Yes2
---
--Yes
CV500-BI111
CVM1D-BI101
I/O Interface Unit
Backplane
Backplane supporting online
I/O replacement
-------
Yes
Yes2
---
----Yes
CV500-II101
CV500-BI112
CVM1D-BI102
Backplane for C2000 duplex
system
Yes2
---
---
C2000-BI082/083
Direct-connect Backplane
Backplane for C-series
I/O Interface Unit
16-point/32-point/64-point I/O Units
--Yes2
--Yes
No3
--Yes
---
---------
CVM1-BI114
C500-BI181
CV500-II201
---
Special I/O Units
Yes
---
---
---
Motion Control Unit
---
Yes
---
CV500-MC421
BASIC Unit
---
Yes
---
CV500-BSCj1
Personal Computer Unit
---
Yes
---
CV500-VPjjj
Temperature Control Data Link Unit
Link Systems
y
SYSMAC NET
---
Yes
---
CV500-TDL21
SYSMAC LINK
Host Link Unit
Ethernet Unit
Controller Link Unit
SYSMAC BUS/2
-------------
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-------------
CV500-SNT31
CV500-SLK11/SLK21
CV500-LK201
CV500-ETN01
CVM1-CLK21
CV500-RM211/221
CV500-RT211/221
SYSMAC BUS Units
CompoBus/D Master Units
Yes
---
--Yes
-----
--CVM1-DRM21-V1
Expansion CPU CPU Backplane
B k l
Backplane
CPU Backplane supporting
online I/O replacement
Expansion I/O
B k l
Backplane
Remote I/O
Systems
y
Note
1. The 5 VDC output voltage in the CVM1 and CV-series Power Supply Units is
different from that in the CVM1D Power Supply Units, so they are not interchangeable.
2. The Backplanes can be used, but do not support online I/O Unit replacement or redundant Power Supply Units.
3. These Backplanes cannot be connected directly in a CVM1D system.
12
Section
Related Manuals
1-8
1-8
Related Manuals
The following manuals are available for the various CVM1D-series and related
products. Catalog number suffixes have been omitted; be sure you have the
most recent version for your region.
Product
CVM1D Duplex System PCs
Model number
Manual
Cat. No.
---
CVM1D Duplex System PC Installation Guide
W350
---
CVM1D Duplex System PC Operation Manual
W351
CV-series Host Link Unit
CV500-LK201
CV-series PCs Operation Manual: Host Link
System,
W205
SYSMAC Support Software
(SSS)
C500-ZL3AT1-E
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual:
Basics
W247
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual:
CVM1 PCs
W249
Programming Console
CVM1-PRS21-V1E
Programming Console Operation Manual
W222
CompoBus/D Master Unit
CVM1-DRM21-V1
CompoBus/D Master Unit Operation Manual
W267
Controller Link Unit
CVM1-CLK21
Controller Link Unit Operation Manual
W309
Controller Link Support
Software
C200H-ZW3AT2-E
Controller Link Support Software Operation
Manual
W308
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
CVM1-SNT31
SYSMAC NET Link System Manual
W213
SYSMAC LINK Unit
CV500-SLK11/SLK21
SYSMAC LINK System Manual
W212
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O
Units
CV500-RM211/RM221/
RT211/ RT221
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System Manual
W204
SYSMAC BUS Wired Remote
I/O Units
3G2A5-RM201/RT201
SYSMAC BUS Wired Remote I/O System
Manual
W120
Ethernet Unit
CV500-ETN01
CV500-BSC11/BSC21/
BSC31/BSC41/BSC51/
BSC61
CV-series Ethernet System Manual
W242
BASIC Unit Reference Manual
W207
BASIC Unit Operation Manual
W206
Temperature Controller Data
Link Unit
CV500-TDL21
Temperature Controller Data Link Unit
Operation Manual
W244
Personal Computer Unit
CV500-VP213-E/
VP223-E/VP217-E/
VP227-E
Personal Computer Unit Operation Manual
W251
Personal Computer Unit Technical Manual
W252
BASIC Unit
Analog I/O Units
High-speed
High
s eed Counter Unit
Motion Control Unit
Position Control Unit
MC Support Software
Teaching
g Box
3G2A5-AD001/AD002/ Analog I/O Units Operation Manual
AD003/AD004/AD005/A
D006/AD007,
C500-AD101
3G2A5-DA001/DA002/
DA003/DA004/DA005,
C500-DA101/DA103
W258
C500-AD501
3G2A5-CT001,
3G2A5
CT001,
C500-CT012
Analog I/O Unit Operation Manual
High-speed
Operation
High
s eed Counter Unit O
eration Manual
W259
W129
C500-CT021
C500-CT041
CV500-MC221/MC421
High-speed Counter Unit Operation Manual
High-speed Counter Unit Operation Manual
Motion Control Unit Operation Manual:
Introduction
W253
W185
W254
C500-NC113/NC211
3G2A5-NC111-EV1
C500-NC222-E
CV500-ZN3AT1-E
Motion Control Unit Operation Manual: Details
Position Control Unit Operation Manual
Position Control Unit Operation Manual
Position Control Unit Operation Manual
MC Support Software Operation Manual
W255
W323
W142
W231
W247
C500-TU002-E
CVM1-PRS71
Teaching Box Operation Manual
Teaching Box Operation Manual
W145
W257
13
Section
Related Manuals
Product
Model number
Manual
Cat. No.
Cam Positioner Unit
C500-CP131
Cam Positioner Unit Operation Manual
W144
Fuzzy Logic Unit
C500-FZ001
Fuzzy Logic Unit Operation Manual
W209
ASCII Unit
C500-ASC04
ASCII Unit Operation Manual
W186
ID Sensor Unit
C500-IDS01-V2/
IDS02-V1/IDS21/
IDS22
ID Sensor Unit Operation Manual
W126
Memory Card Writer
CV500-MCW01-E
Memory Card Writer Operation Manual
W214
14
1-8
SECTION 2
System Configuration and Components
This section provides information about the types of system configuration in which the CVM1D PCs can be used and the
individual Units that make up these configuration. Refer to Appendix A Standard Models for a list of OMRON products that
can be used in CVM1D PC Systems.
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Basic Duplex System with Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Duplex System with an Expansion CPU Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3 Duplex System with CV-series Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-4 Duplex System with C-series Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Mounting Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 CPU Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 Expansion CPU Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-3 Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-1 CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-2 Duplex Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-3 I/O Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-4 I/O Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-5 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-6 Terminating Resistance Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-7 I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
Section
System Configuration
2-1
2-1
System Configuration
This section provides examples of the following four duplex systems.
1, 2, 3...
1. Basic System with a CVM1D CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks
• Up to 5 CPU Bus Units can be used.
• Redundant Power Supply Units are used and I/O Units can be replaced
online.
2. System with a CVM1D CPU Rack, Expansion CPU Rack, and Expansion
I/O Racks
• Up to 15 CPU Bus Units can be used.
• Redundant Power Supply Units are used and I/O Units can be replaced
online.
3. System with a CVM1D CPU Rack, CVM1 or CV-series Expansion CPU
Rack, and CVM1 or CV-series Expansion I/O Racks
• Demonstrates how a CVM1 or CV-series system can be converted to a duplex system.
• Redundant Power Supply Units are used and I/O Units can be replaced
online in the CPU Rack, but not the CVM1 or CV-series Racks.
• CVM1 or CV-series Expansion I/O Racks without I/O Interface Units cannot be connected.
4. System with a CVM1D CPU Rack and C-series Expansion I/O Racks
• Demonstrates how a C2000H duplex system can be upgraded to a
CVM1D duplex system.
• Redundant Power Supply Units are used and I/O Units can be replaced
online in the CPU Rack, but not the C-series Racks.
• C-series Racks cannot be combined with CVM1 or CV-series Expansion
I/O Racks.
2-1-1 Basic Duplex System with Expansion I/O Racks
The following figure shows a basic duplex system with a CVM1D CPU Rack and
seven Expansion I/O Racks. Up to 2,048 I/O points (128 words) can be used in
the PC.
CPU Rack
Any of the Units listed in the diagram can be connected to the CPU Rack. (Up to 5
CPU Bus Units can be connected.)
Expansion I/O Racks
• Up to seven Expansion I/O Racks may be connected in two series from the
CPU Rack.
• When CVM1D Backplanes that can accommodate two Power Supply Units
are used, redundant Power Supply Units can be used and I/O Units can be replaced online.
• CVM1 and CV-series Expansion I/O Racks can be combined with the CVM1D
Racks, but not C500 Expansion I/O Racks.
• The total length of I/O Connecting Cable must be 50 m or less for each series.
• A Terminating Resistance Unit must be be connected to the last Rack in each
series.
• Even when there is only one series of Expansion I/O Racks, be sure to install a
Terminating Resistance Unit in the I/O Control Unit’s unused connector.
16
Section
System Configuration
2-1
• Up to eight C500 Special I/O Units can be connected to one rack.
CV500-IC201
I/O Control Unit
CVM1D-DPL01
Duplex Unit
CVM1D-BC051 CPU Backplane
CVM1D-CPU21
CPU Units
CVM1D-PA208/212
Power Supply Units
CV-series CPU Bus Units:
(such as SYSMAC NET Link Units, SYSMAC LINK Units,
Personal Computer Units, or BASIC Units)
C500 I/O Units
C500 Special I/O Units
SYSMAC BUS Masters
CV500-CNjj2
I/O Connecting
Cable
CVM1D-BI102
I/O Backplane
CV500-II201
I/O Interface Unit
CVM1D-PA208/212
Power Supply Units
17
Section
System Configuration
2-1
2-1-2 Duplex System with an Expansion CPU Rack
When six or more CPU Bus Units (up to 15 CPU Bus Units) are required in a
System, the CPU Rack may be extended by connecting an Expansion CPU
Rack.
The following figure shows a duplex system with a CVM1D CPU Rack, an Expansion CPU Rack, and six Expansion I/O Racks. Up to 2,048 I/O points (128
words) can be used in the PC.
CPU Rack
Any of the Units listed in the diagram can be connected to the CPU Rack. (Up to 5
CPU Bus Units can be connected.)
Expansion CPU Rack
• Any of the Units listed in the diagram can be connected to the Expansion CPU
Rack. (Up to 10 CPU Bus Units can be connected.)
• Only one Expansion CPU Rack can be connected to the CPU Rack.
• The following CPU Bus Units can be connected. Together, the CPU Rack and
Expansion CPU Rack can accommodate up to 15 CPU Bus Units.
Motion Control Units (MC421), Temperature Controller Data Link Units,
Ethernet Units, SYSMAC NET Link Units, SYSMAC LINK Units, SYSMAC
BUS/2 Masters, BASIC Units, and Personal Computer Units
• If an Expansion I/O Rack isn’t connected, be sure to install a Terminating Resistance Unit in the I/O Control Unit’s unused connector.
Expansion I/O Racks
• Up to six Expansion I/O Racks may be connected in two series from the CPU
Rack.
• When CVM1D Backplanes that can accommodate two Power Supply Units
are used, redundant Power Supply Units can be used and I/O Units can be replaced online.
• CVM1 and CV-series Expansion I/O Racks can be combined with the CVM1D
Racks, but not C500 Expansion I/O Racks.
• The total length of I/O Connecting Cable must be 50 m or less for each series.
• A Terminating Resistance Unit must be be connected to the last Rack in each
series.
• Even when there is only one series of Expansion I/O Racks, be sure to install a
Terminating Resistance Unit in the I/O Control Unit’s unused connector.
18
Section
System Configuration
2-1
• Up to eight C500 Special I/O Units can be connected to one rack.
CV500-IC101
I/O Control Unit
CVM1D-DPL01
Duplex Unit
CVM1D-BC051 CPU Backplane
CVM1D-PA208/212
Power Supply Units
CVM1D-CPU21
CPU Units
CV-series CPU Bus Units:
(such as SYSMAC NET Link Units, SYSMAC LINK Units,
Personal Computer Units, or BASIC Units)
C500 I/O Units
C500 Special I/O Units
SYSMAC BUS Masters
CV500-CNjj1
CPU Connecting Cable
I/O Interface Unit
CV500-II101
CVM1D-BI101
Backplane
CVM1D-PA208/212
Power Supply Units
CV500-CNjj2
I/O Connecting Cable
CV500-II201
I/O Interface Unit
CVM1D-BI102
Backplane
2-1-3 Duplex System with CV-series Expansion I/O Racks
A CV-series system can be upgraded to a duplex system by connecting a
CVM1D CPU Rack to the CV-series Expansion I/O Racks. This example shows
only Expansion I/O Racks, but a CV-series Expansion CPU Rack can be connected, too. Up to 2,048 I/O points (128 words) can be used in the PC.
I/O Units connected to CV-series Expansion I/O Racks and Expansion CPU
Racks cannot be replaced online.
CPU Rack
Any of the Units listed in the diagram can be connected to the CPU Rack. (Up to 5
CPU Bus Units can be connected.)
19
Section
System Configuration
2-1
Expansion I/O Racks
• Up to seven Expansion I/O Racks may be connected in two series from the
CPU Rack.
• The total length of I/O Connecting Cable must be 50 m or less for each series.
• A Terminating Resistance Unit must be be connected to the last Rack in each
series.
• Even when there is only one series of Expansion I/O Racks, be sure to install a
Terminating Resistance Unit in the I/O Control Unit’s unused connector.
• Up to eight C500 Special I/O Units can be connected to one rack.
CV500-IC201
I/O Control Unit
CVM1D-DPL01
Duplex Unit
CVM1D-BC051 CPU Backplane
CVM1D-PA208/212 Power Supply Units
CVM1D-CPU21
CPU Units
CV-series CPU Bus Units
(such as SYSMAC NET Link Units, SYSMAC LINK Units,
Personal Computer Units, or BASIC Units)
C500 I/O Units
C500 Special I/O Units
SYSMAC BUS Masters
C500-CNjj2
I/O Connecting
Cable
CV500-II201
I/O Interface Unit
CV500-BI042/062/112
Backplane
CV500-PS221/211
CVM1-PA208
Power Supply Unit
20
Section
System Configuration
2-1
2-1-4 Duplex System with C-series Expansion I/O Racks
A C-series system (C500, C1000H, C2000H, or C2000H duplex system) can be
upgraded to a CVM1D duplex system by connecting a CVM1D CPU Rack to the
C-series Expansion I/O Racks. Up to 2,048 I/O points (128 words) can be used
in the PC.
CPU Rack
Any of the Units listed in the diagram can be connected to the CPU Rack. (Up to 5
CPU Bus Units can be connected.)
Expansion I/O Racks
• I/O Units connected to C-series Expansion I/O Racks cannot be replaced online.
• C-series Expansion I/O Racks cannot be combined with CV-series or CVM1D
Expansion I/O Racks.
• Up to seven Expansion I/O Racks may be connected in one series.
• The total length of I/O Connecting Cable must be 5 m or less.
• Terminating Resistance Units are not required.
• With the 3G2A5-II002 I/O Interface Unit, use Units with lot number 0574 or later.
21
Section
System Configuration
2-1
• Up to eight C500 Special I/O Units can be connected to one rack.
CV500-IC301
I/O Control Unit
CVM1D-DPL01
Duplex Unit
CVM1D-BC051 CPU Backplane
CVM1D-PA208/212
CVM1D-CPU21
Power Supply Units
CPU Units
CV-series CPU Bus Units
(such as SYSMAC NET Link Units, SYSMAC LINK Units,
Personal Computer Units, or BASIC Units)
C500 I/O Units
C500 Special I/O Units
SYSMAC BUS Masters
C500-CNjjjN
I/O Connecting Cables
3G2A5-PS222-E/212-E
Power Supply Unit
3G2A5-BI081/051
3G2C5-BI083
I/O Backplane
3G2A5-II002
I/O Interface Unit
22
Section
Unit Mounting Limitations
2-2
2-2
Unit Mounting Limitations
The following tables show the Racks in which the various C-series and CV-series I/O Units, Special Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units can be
mounted.
I/O Units
Unit
A “Yes” indicates that the Unit can be mounted in the Rack.
CPU
Rack
Expansion CPU Rack
Expansion I/O Racks
Remote I/O Slave
Racks
CVM1D
CV-series
CVM1D
CV-series
C500
Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane
SYSMAC
BUS/2
SYSMAC
BUS
C500-Ijjjj
Input Units
Yes1
Yes1
Yes
Yes1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-OIjjjj
Output Units
Yes1
Yes1
Yes
Yes1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-MDjjjj
DC Input/Transistor
Output Unit
Yes1
Yes1
Yes
Yes1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C2000-ID216
Interrupt Input Unit2
No
No
Note
A “Yes” indicates that the Unit can be mounted in the Rack.
Other Units
Unit
1. The Unit can be mounted in the Rack and can be replaced online with the
CVM1-PRS21-EV1 Programming Console.
2. Interrupt Input Units cannot be used in a CVM1D duplex system. If an Interrupt Input Unit is mounted, it will operate as a normal 8-point Input Unit.
CPU
Rack
Expansion CPU Rack
Expansion I/O Racks
Remote I/O Slave
Racks
CVM1D
CV-series
CVM1D
CV-series
C500
SYSMAC
Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane
BUS/2
SYSMAC
BUS
C500-IPS01 I/O
Power Supply Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-DUM01
Dummy I/O Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CV500-PS221/211
Power Supply Unit
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
CVM1-PA208
Power Supply Unit
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
CVM1D-PA208/212
Power Supply Unit
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
3G2A5-PS221-E/222
-E/223-E
Power Supply Unit
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
23
Section
Unit Mounting Limitations
Special I/O Units
Unit
A “Yes” indicates that the Unit can be mounted in the Rack.
CPU
Rack
Expansion CPU Rack
Expansion I/O Racks
Remote I/O Slave
Racks
CVM1D
CV-series
CVM1D
CV-series
C500
SYSMAC
Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane
BUS/2
SYSMAC
BUS
C500-ADjjj
Analog Input Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-DAjjj
Analog Output Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-PIDjj
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-TS501/502
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-CT021 Highspeed Counter Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-CT041 Highspeed Counter Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
C500-CT001/012
High-speed Counter
Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-NCjjj
Position Control Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-NC103/121
Position Control Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
C500-NC221/222
Position Control Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
C500-CP131
Cam Positioner Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
C500-ASC04
ASCII Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-ASC03
ASCII Unit
No
C500-FZ001
Fuzzy Logic Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
C500-MGC01
Yes
Magnetic Card Reader Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
C500-LDP01 Ladder
Program I/O Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
C500-IDSjj
ID Sensor Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C500-GDI11/12
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
24
2-2
Section
Unit Mounting Limitations
CPU Bus Units and
Special Units
Unit
2-2
A “Yes” indicates that the Unit can be mounted in the Rack.
CPU
Rack
Expansion CPU Rack
Expansion I/O Racks
Remote I/O Slave
Racks
CVM1D
CV-series
CVM1D
CV-series
C500
SYSMAC
Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane
BUS/2
SYSMAC
BUS
CV500-ETN01
Ethernet Unit
4 Units total
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CV500-SNT31
SYSMAC NET Link
Unit
4 Units total
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CV500-SLK11/21
SYSMAC LINK Unit
4 Units total
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
C1000H-APS01
Power Feeder Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CV500-LK201
Host Link Unit
4 Units total
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
C500-RMjjj
SYSMAC BUS
Remote I/O Master
4 Units total
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
CVM1-DRM21-V1
CompoBus/D Master
15 Units with Configurator, 1 without
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CV500-RM211/221
SYSMAC BUS/2
Remote I/O Master
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CV500-RT211/221
SYSMAC BUS/2
Remote I/O Slave
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
CV500-BSCj1
Basic Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CV500-VPjjj
Personal Computer
Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CV500-TDL21
Temperature
Controller Data Link
Unit
CV500-MC221/421
Motion Control Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
CV500-CLK21
Controller Link Unit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
25
Section
Racks
2-3
2-3
Racks
2-3-1 CPU Racks
The CPU Rack is made up of the Units shown in the following diagrams.
Duplex System Configuration
I/O Control Unit
Duplex Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Power Supply Units
CPU Backplane
I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CPU Bus Units
5 Units total
Simplex System Configuration
A CVM1D PC can be operated in simplex mode with just one CPU Unit, but a
Duplex Unit is still required. The CPU Unit may be mounted in either the left or
right slot.
Duplex Unit
I/O Control Unit
CPU Unit
Power Supply Units
CPU Backplane
I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CPU Bus Units
26
5 Units total
Section
Racks
CPU Backplane
2-3
Use the CVM1D-BC051 CPU Backplane in the CPU Rack. Other CPU Backplanes cannot be used in the CVM1D system.
5 slots:
C500 I/O Units
C500 Special Units
CV-series CPU Bus Units
Duplex Unit connector
Mounting holes
(Four M5 holes)
I/O Control Unit
connector
Handle (2)
Power Supply Unit
connectors
CPU Unit
connectors
Connectors for I/O Units, Special
Units, and CPU Bus Units
Required Units
Unit
The EM Unit and Memory Card aren’t required, but can be installed in the CPU
Unit to provide additional memory when necessary.
Model number
Number
of Units
Comments
Page
CPU Backplane
CVM1D-BC051
1
For the CPU Rack only
27
CPU Unit
CVM1D-CPU21
2
---
31
EM Unit
Memory Card
Duplex Unit
CV1000-DMj51
HMC-Ejjj1
CVM1D-DPL01
(2)
(2)
1
Optional.
Optional.
For the CPU Rack only
33
33
36
Power Supply Unit CVM1D-PA208
CVM1D-PA212
2
Use Power Supply Units with the same specifications when
two Units are used.
43
CPU Bus Units,
Special I/O Units,
and I/O Units
I/O Control Unit
---
---
5 Units can be mounted.
---
CV500-IC101
CV500-IC201
CV500-IC301
1
Required when connecting an Expansion CPU Rack.
Connects to an Expansion I/O Rack.
Required when connecting a C500 Expansion I/O Rack.
39
27
Section
Racks
2-3
2-3-2 Expansion CPU Racks
An Expansion CPU Rack can be connected when 6 or more CPU Bus Units (up
to 15) are required. Like the CPU Rack, a CVM1D Expansion CPU Rack accommodates two Power Supply Units and supports online I/O Unit replacement.
• Just one Expansion CPU Rack can be connected to the CPU Rack and up to 6
Expansion I/O Racks can be connected to the Expansion CPU Rack.
• Use a CV500-IC101 I/O Control Unit in the CPU Rack.
• Two cables are required to connect the Expansion CPU Rack to the CPU
Rack, a CPU Bus Cable and an I/O Connecting Cable.
• If no Expansion I/O Racks are being connected, the Expansion CPU Rack is
the terminator Rack, so a CV500-TER01 Terminating Resistance Unit must be
connected to the I/O Control Unit. Two Terminating Resistance Units are included with each I/O Control Unit.
Power Supply Units
I/O Interface Unit
Expansion CPU
Backplane
I/O Units
Special I/O Units
CPU Bus Units
Unit
Expansion CPU
Backplane
Up to 10 Units total
Model number
CVM1D-BI101
Comments
Accommodates two Power Supply Units and
supports online I/O Unit replacement.
Power Supply Unit CVM1D-PA208
CVM1D-PA212
Use Power Supply Units with the same
specifications when two Units are used.
CPU Bus Units,
Special I/O Units,
and I/O Units
---
I/O Interface Unit
CV500-II101
A total of 10 Units can be mounted. Refer to
2-2 Unit Mounting Limitations for tables
showing which Units can be mounted in an
Expansion CPU Rack.
Also used in CVM1 and CV-series PCs.
There are limitations on the number of Units that can be mounted and the total
current consumption of the mounted Units. Refer to 2-2 Unit Mounting Limitations for details on the limitations on the number of Units and Appendix B Specifications for details on current consumption.
Note A CVM1/CV-series Expansion CPU Rack can be used in a CVM1D system, although it will not accommodate two Power Supply Units or support online I/O
Unit replacement. Refer to the CV-series PC Installation Guide for details on the
configuration of CVM1 and CV-series Expansion CPU Racks.
28
Section
Racks
2-3
Expansion CPU Backplane (CVM1D-BI101)
10 slots:
C500 I/O Units
C500 Special Units
CV-series CPU Bus Units (CPU Bus Units cannot be mounted in
an Expansion I/O Backplane.)
Mounting holes
(Four M5 holes)
I/O Interface Unit
connector
Handles (2)
CPU Bus Unit connectors
(Not found in Expansion I/O Backplanes.)
I/O Unit
connectors
Power Supply Unit
connectors
2-3-3 Expansion I/O Racks
CVM1D Expansion I/O Racks accommodate two Power Supply Units and support online I/O Unit replacement.
Power Supply Units
I/O Interface Unit
Expansion I/O
Backplane
CV500-TER01
Terminating
Resistance Unit
I/O Units and
Special I/O Units
Unit
Expansion I/O
Backplane
Model number
CVM1D-BI102
Comments
Accommodates two Power Supply Units and
supports online I/O Unit replacement.
Power Supply Unit CVM1D-PA208
CVM1D-PA212
Use Power Supply Units with the same
specifications when two Units are used.
Special I/O Units
and I/O Units
---
A total of 10 Units can be mounted.
CPU Bus Units cannot be mounted.
I/O Interface Unit
CV500-II201
Also used in CVM1 and CV-series PCs.
Use the CVM1D-BI102 Expansion I/O Backplane when you want redundant
Power Supply Units or want to replace I/O Units online.
Using CVM1 and
CV-series Expansion I/O
Racks
CVM1 and CV-series Expansion I/O Racks can be connected and combined
with CVM1D Expansion I/O Racks, although the CVM1/CV-series Racks will not
accommodate two Power Supply Units or support online I/O Unit replacement.
Refer to the CV-series PC Installation Guide for details on the configuration of
CVM1 and CV-series Expansion I/O Racks.
29
Section
Racks
Using C-series
Expansion I/O Racks
C500 Expansion I/O Racks can be connected, but cannot be combined with
CVM1D, CVM1, or CV-series Expansion I/O Racks. The C-series Racks will not
accommodate two Power Supply Units or support online I/O Unit replacement.
Refer to the C1000H/C2000H PC Installation Guide for details on the configuration of C500 Expansion I/O Racks.
Expansion I/O Backplane (CVM1D-BI102)
10 slots:
C500 I/O Units
C500 Special Units
(CPU Bus Units cannot be connected.)
Mounting holes
(Four M5 holes)
I/O Interface Unit
connector
Handle (2)
I/O Unit
connectors
30
2-3
Power Supply Unit
connectors
Section
Rack Components
2-4
2-4
Rack Components
This section describes the main components that are used to construct CPU,
Expansion CPU, and Expansion I/O Racks.
Note See Appendix B Specifications for Unit dimensions and weight.
2-4-1 CPU Unit
One or two CVM1D-CPU21 CPU Units must be used in the CPU Rack in CVM1D
PCs. Two CPU Units are required for a duplex system. Only one CPU Unit is required for simplex operation.
1. CPU Indicators
2. Protect Keyswitch
3. EM Unit compartment
6. Protective covers
(Do not remove.)
5. Memory Card
indicator
4. Memory Card
compartment
1, 2, 3...
1. CPU Indicators
POWER
Lights when power (5 VDC) is supplied to the CPU.
RUN
Lights when the CPU Unit is executing the program in RUN or
MONITOR mode.
Lights when the CPU Unit has detected a fatal error (such as a
memory error). When a fatal error is detected, operation will be
stopped and all outputs on Output Units will be turned OFF.
ERROR
WDT
Lights when a watchdog timer error is detected. When the error is
detected, operation will be stopped and all outputs on Output Units
will be turned OFF.
ALARM
Lights when non-fatal error is detected. CPU Unit operation will
continue.
OUTINH Lights when the Output OFF Bit (A00015) is turned ON. All outputs
on Output Units will be turned OFF.
COMM
Lights when data is being exchanged with a host computer.
31
Section
Rack Components
2-4
2. Protect Keyswitch
The Protect Keyswitch can be set to write-protect the user program, PC Setup, and CPU Bus Unit settings.
The UM PROTECT operation can also be executed from a Programming
Device such as SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) to prevent access (read/
write access) to the program. When both protect functions are applied, the
Protect Keyswitch setting overrides the UM PROTECT operation.
In duplex mode, the Protect Keyswitch’s write-protection is temporarily suspended during duplex synchronization or program transfer. Write-protection
is enabled again after the duplex synchronization or program transfer is
completed.
3. EM Unit Compartment
An EM Unit (sold separately) can be installed in this compartment. See Expansion Data Memory on page 33 or more details.
4. This compartment contains the Memory Card slot, CPU DIP Switch,
Memory Card power switch, and backup battery.
a) Memory Card slot
When using file memory, insert a Memory Card in the Memory Card slot.
b) CPU DIP Switch
Pin(s)
1, 2
---
Pins 1 and 2 determine which files will be transferred
from the CPU Unit to the Memory Card.
(UM is an abbreviation of user program memory.)
Start the data transfer by pressing the Memory Card
power switch for 3 seconds.
3
OFF, OFF
ON, OFF
OFF, ON
ON, ON
OFF
Back up UM, PC Setup, I/O memory, and DM.
Back up PC Setup.
Back up UM.
Back up I/O memory and DM.
Not used. (Leave this pin set to OFF.)
OFF
Not used. (Leave this pin set to OFF.)
OFF
Files are not transferred from the Memory Card automatically at start-up.
ON
The program file, PC Setup file, and CPU Bus Unit
settings file will be transferred from the Memory Card
to the CPU Unit automatically at start-up.
4
5
Position
Function
(In a duplex system, the files are transferred in the
active CPU Unit only. The files aren’t transferred in
the standby CPU Unit.
The automatic transfer at start-up setting can be
made in the PC Setup as well, but the setting on pin 5
supercedes the PC Setup setting.
The files will not be transferred if the Protect Keyswitch is set to PROTECT.)
6
OFF
Not used. (Leave this pin set to OFF.)
c) Memory Card power switch
Press and release to turn the power to the Memory Card off and on.
Press and hold the switch for 3 seconds to start the backup. Refer to
2-4-3 Simplified Backup Function in the CVM1D Operation Manual for
more details.
d) Memory Card eject button
Press to eject the Memory Card. Never eject the Memory Card while the
Memory Card ON indicator is lit.
e) Backup battery compartment
Contains the battery which backs up the CPU Unit’s program and data.
32
Section
Rack Components
2-4
5. Memory Card indicator (M/C ON)
The Memory Card indicator will be lit when the power is on. The indicator will
go off and on each time that the Memory Card power switch is pressed. Be
sure to verify that the indicator is not lit before removing the Memory Card.
6. Protective covers
Do not remove the protective covers.
Expansion Data Memory Units (EM Units)
An EM Unit may be installed in the CPU Unit when the EM Area is needed to
supplement the capacity of the DM Area. The addition of an EM Unit increases
the data memory capacity of the CVM1D from 24K words (D00000 to D24575) to
up to 256K words. This EM Area memory is divided into 32K-word banks.
When EM Units are used in a duplex system, the same model of EM Unit must be
installed in both CPU Units.
EM Units are sold separately, order one of the following EM Units when required.
Model
Memory capacity
EM Area words
CV1000-DM641
64K words
E00000 to E32765 x 2 banks
CV1000-DM151
128K words
E00000 to E32765 x 4 banks
CV1000-DM251
256K words
E00000 to E32765 x 8 banks
Memory element
Pullout
lever
CPU
connector
Backup
capacitor
EM Unit
When mounted to the CPU, the EM Unit is backed up by the battery mounted in
the CPU. When the EM Unit is removed from the CPU Unit, a built-in capacitor
will back up the Unit’s memory for up to 10 minutes without memory loss. It takes
about 1 minute in the CPU Unit for the built-in capacitor to become fully charged.
Note See 3-1-2 Memory Cards and 3-1-3 EM Units for details on installing and removing the EM Unit.
Memory Cards
Memory Cards can be used to store data or programs as files to expand the
memory storage capacity of the PC. CVM1D PCs cannot use the FILR(180),
FILW(181), FILP(182), and FLSP(183) instructions, so Memory Card files cannot be accessed (read or written) from the program.
Files stored in the Memory Card can be read to the CPU automatically at startup.
Also, data can be backed up from the CPU to the Memory Card when the power
is turned off. These functions are controlled by settings on the CPU DIP Switch.
(See page 32 for details on DIP Switch settings.)
33
Section
Rack Components
2-4
When Memory Cards have been installed in the two CPU Units in a duplex system, the files are not transferred or verified between the two Units. Be sure to
verify the Memory Card contents when necessary.
Memory
RAM
EEPROM
EPROM
Model
Capacity
HMC-ES641
HMC-ES151
HMC-ES251
HMC-ES551
HMC-EE641
64K bytes
128K bytes
256K bytes
512K bytes
64K bytes
Remarks
Data can be written from a Programming
g
g
D i
Device.
HMC-EE151
128K bytes
Data can be written from a Programming
Device when the PC is in PROGRAM
mode.
HMC-EP551
HMC-EP161
512K bytes
1M bytes
CV500-MCWjj
jj Memory
y Card Writer or
P
Programming
i D
Device
i required
i d
The SSS can be used to write data to RAM and EEPROM Cards, but a
CV500-MCWjj Memory Card Writer must be used to write data to EPROM
Memory Cards.
The following commercially available memory cards can be used. The procedures and applications for using these memory cards is exactly the same as for
the Memory Cards provided by OMRON.
• RAM Memory Cards conforming to JEIDA4.0 and of the following sizes:
64 Kbytes, 128 Kbytes, 256 Kbytes, 512 Kbytes, 1 Mbyte, and 2 Mbytes.
Note The 2-Mbyte Memory Cards cannot be used in the CV500-MCW01 Memory
Card Writer.
! Caution
Memory Cards can be damaged by twisting, shock, or exposure to high temperature, humidity, or direct sunlight. Handle them with care.
Simplified Backup
Function
The user program, Extended PC Setup, and IOM/DM data can be backed up
from the CPU Unit to a Memory Card very simply without using a Programming
Device. The backup data in the Memory Card can be transferred back to the
CPU Unit later. Refer to 2-4-3 Simplified Backup Function in the CVM1D Operation Manual for more details.
RAM and EEPROM Cards
Data can be randomly written to and read from RAM or EEPROM Cards, making
it possible to easily store programs. Data can be written to RAM Cards while they
are mounted in the CPU using the SSS. Refer to the SSS Operation Manuals for
details.
Both the RAM and EEPROM Memory Cards are equipped with write-protect
switches. Setting the write-protect switch to ON prevents data from being written
to or erased from the Card. Setting the write-protect switch to OFF allows data to
be written to or erased from the Card.
Write-protect
switch
34
Section
Rack Components
2-4
Insert a battery into a RAM Memory Card before mounting the Card into the
CPU. Leave the battery in its holder. Battery life expectancies at 20_C are given
below. Replace the battery within the time listed. Refer to Section 5 Inspection
and Maintenance for the battery replacement procedure.
RAM Card Backup
Battery
Card
! Caution
Capacity
Life
HMC-ES641
64K bytes
5 years
HMC-ES151
128K bytes
2 years
HMC-ES251
256K bytes
1 year
HMC-ES551
512K bytes
6 months
The lithium battery in RAM Cards can burn or explode if it is shorted, crushed, or
heated to more than 100_C. Dispose of the Memory Card properly.
Data contained in the ROM Card is stored on EPROM chips and cannot be altered or erased during the CPU’s operation. The EPROM chip is mounted to the
Memory Card and the entire pack is installed in the CPU. Once data is written to
the chip, the data will not be lost when the power to the PC is OFF.
EPROM Cards
ROM Cards are shipped unprogrammed. The ROM Card can be programmed
using a CV500-MCWjj Memory Card Writer.
The procedure for erasing EPROM Memory Card data is as follows:
1, 2, 3...
1. Open the memory card cover by pressing at an angle on the catch at the
bottom edge of the card using a pointed object, such as a pen.
2. Erase the data from the EPROM chips by exposing the window of the
EPROM chips to ultraviolet light. Any of a number of commercially available
EPROM erasers may be used. To ensure complete erasure, the Memory
Card should be subject to a minimum exposure as specified by the eraser
manufacturer.
3. Close the cover and slide the catch back into place.
Note See 3-1-2 Memory Cards and 3-1-3 EM Units for details on installing and removing the Memory Card.
35
Section
Rack Components
2-4
2-4-2 Duplex Unit
A CVM1D-DPL01 Duplex Unit must be used in the CPU Rack in CVM1D PCs,
even if only one CPU Unit is being used for simplex operation.
1. Duplex Status Indicators
2. CPU Status Indicators
3. CPU Usage
Switches
4. Duplex/Simplex
Mode Switch
8. Communications
DIP Switch
5. Active CPU
Switch
6. Initialize
Button
9. Host Link
Communications Selector
7. Peripheral
Connector
1, 2, 3...
10. Host Link Connector
1. Duplex Indicators
DPL RUN
Lights when the active (ACT) and standby (STB) CPU Units
are synchronizing and operating normally.
DPL BUS ERR Lights when the a bus error has occurred in the duplex
system. When the error occurs, just the active CPU Unit will
operate in simplex mode.
If the error has occurred and the power is turned on, the CPU
will go into wait status.
VERIFY ERR
36
Lights when the program memory or added memory
(EEPROM or EM Unit capacity) do not match in the left and
right CPU Units. When the error occurs, just the active CPU
Unit will operate in simplex mode.
If the error has occurred and the power is turned on, the CPU
will go into wait status.
Section
Rack Components
2-4
2. CPU Status Indicators
ACTIVE
RUN
WAIT
The left or right indicator lights when the corresponding CPU
Unit is the active CPU Unit (the one controlling the system).
Lights when the corresponding CPU Unit is operating in RUN
or MONITOR mode. Both indicators will light when the PC is
operating normally in duplex mode.
Lights when the following condition exists in corresponding
CPU Unit in duplex mode:
S Data in UM (program memory), EEPROM, EM Area, or I/O
memory is being transferred.
S Data in UM , EEPROM, or the EM Area is being compared.
S The START INPUT is open or a Remote I/O Slave Rack’s
power supply is off.
S An initialization error (duplex bus error or duplex verification
error) has occurred.
PROGRAM
CPU ERR
MEM. ERR
PERIPHERAL
HOST LINK
Lights when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode. Both
indicators will light when the PC is in duplex mode.
Lights when an error has occurred in the CPU Unit. See 6-3
Error Messages and Alarm Outputs for details.
Lights when an error has occurred in internal memory, the
Memory Card, or the EM Area. See 6-3 Error Messages and
Alarm Outputs for details.
Indicates whether the peripheral and host link ports are
enabled on the left or right CPU Unit.
3. CPU Usage Switches
These switches control the power supply to the left and right CPU Units.
Power will be supplied to a CPU Unit when its CPU
Usage Switch is set to “CPU USE.” Set the switch to
“NO USE” when the CPU Unit isn’t being used or the
CPU Unit is being replaced with the PC power on.
4. Duplex/Simplex Mode Switch
Set this switch to DPL to operate the PC as a duplex system; set it to SPL to
operate the PC as a simplex system.
DPL: Set to DPL for duplex operation.
SPL: Set to SPL for duplex operation.
This switch setting becomes effective when the power is turned on, a CPU
Usage Switch is switched from NO USE to CPU USE, or the Initialize Button
is pressed. Setting changes during operation are ignored.
5. Active CPU Switch
In a duplex system, this switch determines whether the left or right CPU Unit
is the active CPU Unit. Select which CPU Unit is the active CPU when operating the PC in duplex mode.
ACT. LEFT: Sets the left CPU Unit as the active CPU Unit.
ACT. RIGHT: Sets the right CPU Unit as the active CPU Unit.
This switch setting becomes effective when the power is turned on or a CPU
Usage Switch is switched from NO USE to CPU USE. Setting changes during operation are ignored.
37
Section
Rack Components
2-4
6. Initialize Button
Initializes changes in duplex system operation. For example, press this button when you want to switch from simplex mode to duplex mode after replacing a CPU Unit in which an error occurred.
7. Peripheral Connector
This connector is used to connect a Programming Device such as a computer running SSS or a Programming Console. The baud rate is set on the
Communications DIP Switch. (See below.)
8. Communications DIP Switch
Sets the CPU Unit’s communications specifications.
Pin(s) Position
1,, 2
--OFF, OFF
ON, OFF
OFF, ON
ON, ON
3
OFF
ON
4
Function
Pins 1 and 2 set the baud rate for the peripheral connector.
Programming Device communications: 50,000 bps
Programming Device communications: 19,200 bps
Programming Device communications: 9,600 bps
Programming Device communications: 4,800 bps
Communicate via Host Link communications.
Communicate with PT (Programmable Terminal) via NT
Link communications.
OFF
Host link communications governed by PC Setup.
(Effective only when pin 3 is OFF.)
ON
Initializes host link communications specifications to the
following settings when connecting a personal computer.
(Effective only when pin 3 is OFF.)
Baud rate: 9,600 bps
Unit number 00
Even parity
7-bit data
2 stop bits
5
6
OFF
Not used. (Leave this pin set to OFF.)
---
Sets the terminating resistance for RS-422 communications. (This setting is not used for RS-232 communications. Leave OFF when using RS-232 communications.)
OFF
ON
Terminating resistance OFF.
Terminating resistance ON.
9. Host Link Communications Selector
Set the switch to the communications specification desired for the host link
connector.
10. Host Link Connector
This connector is used for RS-232 or RS-422 communications. Select
RS-232 or RS-422 communications with the host link communications selector (9.). The PERIPHERAL/HOST LINK indicators indicate whether the
left or right CPU Unit is connected.
38
Section
Rack Components
2-4
2-4-3 I/O Control Units
An I/O Control Unit must be mounted to the leftmost slot of the CPU Rack in order
to connect an Expansion CPU Rack or Expansion I/O Rack. The following table
shows which Racks can be connected to the three available I/O Control Units.
I/O Control Unit
Connecting Rack
CV500-IC101
Expansion CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Racks
CV500-IC201
Expansion I/O Racks
CV500-IC301 (see
note)
C500 Expansion I/O Racks
Note For CV500-IC301, use a Unit with a lot number in which the last two digits are 57
or higher (jj57). For the C500-II002, use a Unit with a lot number in which the
last two digits are 74 or higher (jj74).
CV500-IC101
CV500-IC201
Display
Display
Display mode selector
Changes the data displayed
on the display.
Display mode selector
Changes the data displayed
on the display.
CPU Bus Connector
For connecting an Expansion CPU
Rack
I/O Connector
Two series of Expansion I/O Racks can be
connected. Both connectors have identical
functions.
I/O Connector
Two series of Expansion I/O Racks
can be connected. Both connectors
have identical functions.
To connect an Expansion CPU Rack, connect
one I/O connector and the CPU bus connector
to the corresponding connectors on the I/O
Interface Unit on the Expansion CPU Rack.
CV500-IC301
Display
Display mode selector
Changes the data displayed
on the display.
I/O Connector
Connects the I/O Connecting cable
for the C500 Expansion I/O Racks.
Note Refer to Appendix B Specifications for the weight and dimensions of each Unit.
39
Section
Rack Components
Display Modes
2-4
The following diagrams illustrate the four possible modes. The current mode is
indicated by the location of the point on the display.
Mode 1
Mode 1 normally displays the address of the first word on each Rack. The following example illustrates the mode 1 display for a given Rack.
(In this case, the first word allocated is CIO 0036.)
Word Word Word
36 37 38
Indicates mode 1
16
-pt
.
I/O
16
-pt
.
I/O
Note This display will read “0000” if the I/O table hasn’t been registered or
an error occurred during I/O table registration.
During online I/O Unit replacement, the slot number of the Unit that can be replaced is displayed. (In this case, the Unit in slot number 5 can be replaced.)
Indicates slot number being replaced.
Indicates mode 1.
Indicates online replacement.
Mode 2
Mode 2 indicates the operating status of the CPU as well as the rack number.
Indicates the CPU is in the RUN mode, a non-fatal error has occurred, a
Programming Device is connected, and the rack number is 2.
Indicates the rack number
Indicates whether or not Programming Devices are connected.
: A Programming Device is connected to the CPU or to an I/O Interface Unit.
: No Programming Device is connected to the CPU or to an I/O Interface Unit.
Note Only one Programming Device can be connected to the CPU and I/O Interface
Units for each PC, but three additional Programming Devices can be connected
to the SYSMAC BUS/2 Slave Racks.
Indicates mode 2
Indicates the error status of the CPU.
: A fatal error has occurred.
: A non-fatal error has occurred.
: No error has occurred.
Indicates the operating status of the CPU.
: The CPU is operating.
: The CPU has stopped.
40
Section
Rack Components
2-4
Mode 3
In mode 3, data can be output to the display by the I/O DISPLAY instruction
(IODP(189)). The binary information can be display in hexadecimal format (0 to
F) or as segments of a 7-segment display. For details on the I/O DISPLAY instruction, refer to the CVM1D Operation Manual.
Mode 4
In mode 4, the display shows the status of the duplex power supplies. When an
error has occurred, that information takes priority.
Indicates mode 4.
Indicates the status of the right Power Supply Unit.
: Normal operation
: Error occurred
Abbreviation of “Power Supply”
Note The status of duplex power supplies is not displayed on SYSMAC
BUS/2 Remote I/O Slave Units.
2-4-4 I/O Interface Units
One I/O Interface Unit is needed on the Expansion CPU Rack and on each Expansion I/O Rack. Two models of I/O Interface Unit are available, the
CV500-II101 for the Expansion CPU Rack and the CV500-II201 for Expansion
I/O Racks. The I/O Interface Unit must be mounted to the leftmost slot on the
Expansion CPU or Expansion I/O Backplane.
CV500-II101
I/O connectors
The connectors are functionally
identical and either can be used
to connect to the preceding or
succeeding Rack.
CPU bus connector
Display
Rack number switch
Display mode switch
Changes the data displayed
on the display.
41
Section
Rack Components
2-4
CV500-II201
I/O Connectors
Both connectors are functionally
identical and either can be used
to connect to the preceding or
succeeding Rack.
Display
Rack number switch
Display mode switch
Changes the data
displayed on the display.
Programming Device
connector cover
Attach a Terminating Resistance Unit to the unused I/O Connecting Cable Connector of the last Rack in a each series leading from the CPU Rack.
Rack Number Switch
Each Expansion I/O and Expansion CPU Rack is assigned a rack number from 1
through 7. Set the rack number on the rack number switch. Words are allocated
to Racks in order according to rack numbers, starting from the CPU Rack, which
is always rack number 0.
Set the rack number switch using a standard screwdriver. If a number other than
1 through 7 is assigned, or the same rack number is set to more than one Rack,
the PC will not operate
Note Turn OFF the power to the PC before setting the rack number switches.
Display
The display on the I/O Interface Unit is identical to that on the I/O Control Unit on
the CPU Rack. For details on the data displayed in each mode, refer to 2-4-3 I/O
Control Units.
Mode 1
Lit in mode 1
Lit in mode 2
Lit in mode 3
Lit in mode 4
42
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Section
Rack Components
Programming Device
Connector
2-4
The CV500-II201 I/O Interface Unit for Expansion I/O Racks provides a connector for connecting a Programming Device. One Programming Device (SSS or
Programming Console) can be connected to the CPU or an I/O Interface Unit for
each PC, although additional Programming Devices can be connected to Slave
Racks if a SYSMAC BUS/2 System is used. The operation of the Programming
Device is the same whether it is mounted to the CPU or an I/O Interface Unit.
Note When connecting a Programming Device to the CPU or an I/O Interface Unit, set
the baud rate of the CPU to 50k bps with the CPU DIP Switch.
2-4-5 Power Supply Units
A CVM1D Power Supply Unit (CVM1D-PA208 or CVM1D-PA212) must be used
when Rack is assembled with a CVM1D Backplane. Two of these Power Supply
Units can be mounted in a Rack (power supply redundancy) to provide greater
reliability. (The same model Power Supply Unit must be used for both Units.)
Power Supply Units for
CVM1D Backplanes
POWER Indicator
Lights when power is supplied.
Terminals
Power Supply Terminals
Connect a 100 to 120-VAC or
200 to 240-VAC power source.
100 to 240
VAC
L2/N
Line Ground Terminal
Ground independently at a resistance of less than 100 W to
improve noise immunity and prevent electric shock.
NC
Ground Terminal
Ground at a resistance of less than 100 W to prevent electric
shock.
Not used.
NC
START
INPUT
START INPUT
Turn this input ON (short-circuit the terminals) when starting
operation. These terminals are used only on the CPU Rack.
PC
RUN
OUTPUT
PC RUN OUTPUT
These terminals are turned ON during operation (while the
program is being executed), and can be used in any Rack.
Maximum Switching Capacity:
250 VAC: 2 A (resistive load, cosf = 1)
250 VAC: 0.5 A (inductive load, cosf = 0.4)
24 VDC: 2 A
The following diagram shows the dimensions of the Power Supply Unit’s terminals.
Note See Appendix B Specifications for Unit dimensions and weight.
43
Section
Rack Components
2-4
The CVM1D-PA208 and CVM1D-PA212 cannot be used in C500, CVM1, or CVseries Backplanes. See 2-2 Unit Mounting Limitations for a table showing which
Power Supply Units can be mounted in these Racks.
Power Supply Units for
Other Backplanes
2-4-6 Terminating Resistance Units
A Terminating Resistance Unit (CV500-TER01) must be attached to all unused
I/O connectors of I/O Control and I/O Interface Units in the system. Failure to
attach Terminating Resistance Units to the unused I/O connectors will result in
an error and the incorrect operation of the PC. The following example illustrates
the locations where Terminating Resistance Units are required. Two
Terminating Resistance Units are provided with each CV500-IC101/201 I/O
Control Unit.
CPU Rack
CPU Rack
Terminating
Resistance Unit
Terminating
Resistance
Unit
Terminating
Resistance
Unit
Terminating
Resistance Unit
Note Attach and remove Terminating Resistance Units only when PC power is OFF.
44
Section
Rack Components
2-4
2-4-7 I/O Units
I/O Units come in 5 shapes; A-shape, B-shape, C-shape, D-shape, and
E-shape. Refer to Appendix B Specifications for the dimensions of each I/O Unit.
A-shape
B-shape
Mounting screw
Provided at top and bottom.
Mounting screw
Provided at top and bottom.
Nameplate
Fuse blowout alarm indicator
Provided on OD411/OA121/
OA222/OA223.
Nameplate
I/O indicators
Indicate ON/OFF status.
Terminal block mounting screw
Provided at top and bottom.
I/O indicators
Indicate ON/OFF status.
Terminal block mounting screw
Provided at top and bottom.
20-terminal terminal block
Removable.
C-shape
38-terminal terminal block
Removable.
D-shape
Mounting screw
Provided at top and bottom.
Nameplate
I/O indicators
Indicate ON/OFF status.
Mounting screw
Provided at top and bottom.
Nameplate
I/O indicators
Indicate ON/OFF status.
Terminal block mounting screw
Provided at top and bottom.
38-terminal terminal block
Removable.
Two 40-terminal terminal
block connectors
Removable.
45
Section
Rack Components
E-shape
Mounting screw
Provided at top and bottom.
Nameplate
I/O indicators
Indicate ON/OFF status.
Two 24-pin connectors
4-terminal terminal block
46
2-4
SECTION 3
Installation
This section describes how to assemble, mount, and wire a PC including the Backplane and the various Units. Technical specifications and dimensions are provided in Appendix B Specifications. Refer to Section 2 System Configuration and Components for more information on overall system configuration.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Extra Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 EM Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3 Backplane Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU and I/O Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Unit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1 Emergency Stop Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2 Wiring Backplanes to Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-3 Expansion CPU Rack Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-4 Expansion I/O Rack Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-5 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-6 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-7 Power Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-8 Wiring START Input and RUN Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-9 Using the Noise-preventing Spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-10 Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-1 I/O Unit Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-2 Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-3 Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-4 Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-5 I/O Signal Noise Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-6 External Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compliance with EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
Section
Assembly
3-1
3-1
Assembly
3-1-1 Extra Memory
Extra memory is available in two forms, via the use of Memory Cards or by using
an EM Unit. This section outlines the procedure for mounting and removing
these optional memory devices.
3-1-2 Memory Cards
The Memory Card can be used to store data and programs as files. Memory
Cards are optional and are not supplied with the CPU Unit. They must be ordered separately and installed by the user
Installing a Memory Card
1, 2, 3...
Use the following procedure to install a Memory Card in the CPU Unit.
1. Open the cover of the Memory Card compartment.
2. If the Memory Card is RAM or EEPROM, set the write-protect switch to OFF
so that data can be written to the Card.
3. Insert the Memory Card into its compartment. In doing so, a slight resistance
will be felt as the connector on the Memory Card mates with the connector
on the CPU Unit. Continue pushing until the Memory Card is inserted completely into the CPU Unit. If the Memory Card ON/OFF switch is ON, the
Memory Card indicator will light.
4. Close the cover.
Memory Card indicator
Memory Card
ON/OFF switch
Memory Card
eject button
Memory Card
Cover
Removing a Memory Card
1, 2, 3...
Note
48
1. Open the cover of the Memory Card compartment.
2. Press the Memory Card ON/OFF switch once if the Memory Card indicator
is lit. The Memory Card indicator will turn OFF.
3. Press the Memory Card eject button. The Memory Card will be released allowing it to be removed.
4. Pull out the Memory Card.
5. Close the cover.
1. Do not expose the Memory Card to high temperature, humidity, or direct
sunlight.
2. Do not bend the Card or subject it to shock.
3. Do not apply excess force to the Card when inserting or removing it.
4. Do not remove the Card while the Memory Card indicator is lit; doing so may
result in data errors in the memory.
Section
Assembly
3-1
3-1-3 EM Units
Mounting an EM Unit
1, 2, 3...
! Caution
Mount an EM Unit to the CPU Unit using the following procedure.
1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
Do not attempt to mount or remove the EM Unit while the power to the PC is ON.
During mounting or removal, exercise care that you do not directly touch the
memory elements or connector pins of the Unit. Hold the Unit by the lever.
2. Remove the EM Unit cover on the front panel of the CPU Unit by pushing the
lever on the cover upwards, as indicated by the arrow on the cover.
SYSMAC CVM1D
Bracket screw
Bracket
3. Loosen the bracket screw and remove the bracket.
SYSMAC CVM1D
EM Unit
Pullout lever
PCB guides
4. Hold the EM Unit with the component side to the right, and insert the Unit into
the PCB guides. In doing so, a slight resistance will be felt as the connector
on the EM Unit mates with the connector on the CPU Unit. Continue pushing
until the EM Unit is inserted completely into the CPU Unit.
49
Section
Assembly
3-1
5. Re-attach the bracket
Insert the bottom part of the
bracket into the groove of the
case and then press the
bracket into place and tighten
the bracket screw.
Bracket
6. Attach the cover to the compartment.
When the EM Unit is mounted to the CPU Unit, the EM Unit is backed up by the
battery in the CPU Unit.
When the Unit has been removed from the CPU Unit, the memory contents will
be retained for about 10 minutes by a backup capacitor built-in to the Unit, provided that CPU Unit power was ON and that the Unit was mounted in the CPU
Unit for at least 1 minute.
When removing the EM Unit, be sure to turn ON the power to the PC for more
than one minute and then turn it OFF. At that time the capacitor will be fully
charged allowing it to be backed up for 10 minutes. The retention period will be
shorter if EM Unit has been mounted (to the CPU Unit) for less than one minute.
50
Section
Installation Environment
3-2
3-2
Installation Environment
This section details the necessary environmental conditions for installing the
PC.
Ambient Conditions
Do not install the PC in any of the following locations. Doing so will affect PC life
and may affect operating performance.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidities outside the range specified in
the specifications.
• Locations subject to rapid changes in temperature or condensation.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to excessive dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to water, oil, or chemicals.
Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the
following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic or magnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supply lines.
Cooling
Make sure that sufficient clearance is provided between the Racks and consider
installing a cooling fan as measures to prevent the PC from overheating.
Clearance between
Racks
The Racks need to have sufficient room between each other to allow for I/O wiring, and additional room so that the I/O wiring does not prevent adequate cooling. The Racks must also be mounted so that the total length of the Connecting
Cable between all Racks in a given series does not exceed 50 m. As a general
rule, about 70 to 120 mm should be left between any two Racks. Consider factors such as the width of the wiring duct, wiring length, ventilation, and ease of
access to Units, when determining the spacing between Racks. Greater space
is required between Racks when using certain CPU Bus Units and Special I/O
Units. Refer to the operation manuals for the Units being used for details.
Cooling Fan
A cooling fan is not always necessary, but may be required in some installation
locations. Try to avoid mounting the PC in a warm area or over a source of heat
or radiation. A cooling fan is needed if the ambient temperature may exceed
55_C. If the PC is mounted in an enclosure, install a cooling fan, as shown in the
following diagram, to maintain the ambient temperature within the range of 0 to
55_C.
Fan
PC
Louver
51
Section
Installation
3-3
Do not mount the PC in a control panel in which high-power equipment is installed and make sure the point of installation is at least 200 mm away from power lines as shown in the following diagram. Ensure the plate to which the PC is
mounted is grounded.
Power lines
200 mm min.
PC
200 mm min.
When using more than 10 meters of I/O connecting cable, use connecting power
lines of at least 2 mm2 between control panels mounted to Racks.
3-3
Installation
3-3-1 Racks
Every Rack must be mounted vertically, that is, with the printing on the front panels oriented as it would normally read. Racks may be directly mounted to any
sturdy support meeting the environmental specifications.
Whenever possible, use wiring conduits to hold the I/O wiring. Standard wiring
conduit should be used, and it should be long enough to completely contain the
I/O wiring and keep it separated from other cables.
The duct work shown in the following diagrams is not used for mounting the
Racks. Although optional, this duct work can be used to house the wires from the
I/O Units that run along the sides of the Racks, keeping the wires from becoming
entangled. The following diagram illustrate the correct way to mount the Racks.
52
Section
Installation
3-3
Allow at least 40 mm of clear space at the top of every Rack and 30 mm at the
bottom of every Rack.
Input duct
Output duct
Power duct
200 mm min.
30 mm min.
30 mm min.
30 mm
min.
40 mm
min.
Fuses, relays, timers (Do not
install heat-generating
equipment or power equipment.)
Terminal
blocks for PC
Terminal blocks for
power equipment
3-3-2 Control Panel
When mounting the PC in a control panel, mount the Racks to an intermediate
plate. Holes for mounting the Racks to the intermediate plate should be drilled at
intervals shown in the following diagram. Completely ground the intermediate
mounting plates. Use conductor-plated plates to improve noise immunity.
53
Section
Installation
Mounting Height
3-3
The mounting height of CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, or Slave Racks is 123
mm. If peripheral devices or Connecting Cables are used, however, the additional dimensions must be considered. Allow sufficient clearance in the control
panel in which the PC is mounted, as shown in the following diagram.
100 mm
Approx. 140 mm
3-3-3 Backplane Installation
Mounting Dimensions
4650.5
Four, M5
250
CPU Backplane
CVM1D-BC051
70 to 120
250
1500.5
170 to 220
Expansion CPU Backplane
Expansion I/O Backplane
CVM1D-BI101
CVM1D-BI102
1500.5
Four, M5
486
Wiring ducts should be situated so as to allow ventilation and easy replacement
of Units. Leave a space of at least 40 mm above each Rack and at least 30 mm
on all other sides.
To avoid adverse effects from noise and heat when wiring Racks, be sure to provide at least the spaces shown in the following table between Racks and various
other devices (relays and connectors).
54
In front of each Rack.
100 mm min.
Left and right sides of each Rack.
50 mm min.
Section
Rack Connections
3-4
3-4
Rack Connections
Use the specified cables to connect Racks. A Terminating Resistance Unit must
be connected to the I/O Control Unit on the last Rack.
I/O Control Unit
CV500-IC101
CPU Rack
I/O Connecting Cable
I/O Interface Unit
CV500-II201
CPU Connecting
Cable
I/O Interface Unit
CV500-II101
Expansion
CPU Rack
Expansion
I/O Rack
I/O Connecting Cable
I/O Connecting Cable
Expansion
I/O Rack
Expansion
I/O Rack
Expansion
I/O Rack
Expansion
I/O Rack
Terminating resistor must be
connected.
Expansion
I/O Rack
Terminating resistor must be connected.
Connecting Cables
Rack
CPU Rack-to-Expansion CPU Rack
CPU Rack-to-Expansion CPU Rack
CPU Rack-to-Expansion I/O Rack
I/O Rack-to-Expansion I/O Rack
Cable
CPU Connecting
Cable
I/O Connecting
Cable
Model (length)
CV500-CN311 (0.3 m)
CV500-CN611 (0.6 m)
CV500-CN312 (0.3 m)
CV500-CN612 (0.6 m)
CV500-CN122 (1 m)
CV500-CN222 (2 m)
CV500-CN322 (3 m)
CV500-CN522 (5 m)
CV500-CN132 (10 m)
CV500-CN232
CV500 CN232 (20 m)
CV500-CN332 (30 m)
CV500-CN432 (40 m)
CV500-CN532 (50 m)
55
Section
CPU and I/O Connecting Cables
3-5
3-5
CPU and I/O Connecting Cables
The dimensions shown in the following diagram are required for the CPU and I/O
Connecting Cables when they are connected to the I/O Control Units and I/O
Interface Units. Be sure to allow sufficient space for the cables.
I/O Control Unit
Approx.
140 mm
I/O Interface Unit
Approx.
140 mm
The total Connecting Cable length for any one series of Racks must be 50 m or
less. Plan installation locations and choose the Connecting Cables accordingly.
Do not place CPU or I/O Connecting Cables in the same duct as I/O power or
high-voltage lines.
Press in firmly on the connectors and be sure that the connectors on the CPU
and I/O Connecting Cables are locked into place on the I/O Control Unit and I/O
Interface Units. Bus errors, I/O setting errors, and other errors will occur if the
cables are not connected properly.
The connector lock and cable pull strength for the CPU Connecting Cables, I/O
Connecting Cables and Programming Device Cables are 5 kgf.
Always press in on the locks at the top and bottom of the connectors before removing a cable connector.
Connect the CV500-TER01 Terminating Resistor Unit to the unused connectors
on the last I/O Interface Unit and to any unused connectors on the I/O Control
Unit. Two Terminating Resistor Units are provided with the CV500-IC101/IC201
I/O Control Unit.
Note
56
1. The total Connecting Cable length for any one series of Racks must be 50 m
or less.
2. Press in firmly on the connectors until they lock into place.
3. Always press in on the locks at the top and bottom of the connectors before
removing a cable connector.
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
3-6
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6-1 Emergency Stop Circuit
Be sure to wire power lines, control lines, PC cables, and DC I/O cables separately. Supply power separately when using a second power supply in a duplex
system. Use an output terminal (built into Power Supply Unit) for an external
relay to form an emergency stop circuit that will turn OFF the system when the
PC operation stops, to prevent a malfunction in the PC from affecting the whole
system.
MCCB1
MCCB2
Power
200 VAC
CP
Ry
Control circuit
DC voltage
regulator
Tr
Isolation
transformer
DC input/output
+
–
PC RUN output
Ry
CP
Tr
Isolation transformer
3-6-2 Wiring Backplanes to Power Supply Units
The Backplanes of CVM1D CPU Racks, Expansion CPU Racks, and Expansion
I/O Racks can be used in a duplex system, and 5-VDC power can be supplied
simultaneously to the Units mounted to these Racks from two Power Supply
Units. If one of the Power Supply Units malfunctions in a duplex system, power
will automatically be supplied to the Units mounted on the Rack from the other
Power Supply Unit.
Wire the two Power Supply Units separately, so that the system can continue to
operate if there is a power failure in one of the Power Supply Units.
• Wire the power supply for the CPU Rack, the Expansion CPU Rack, and the
Expansion I/O Rack separately (indicated by Aj and Bj in the following diagrams).
• Supply two separate power supplies to the two Power Supply Units for the
CPU Rack and Expansion CPU Rack (A1 and A2).
• Supply separate power supplies to the two Power Supply Units for each Expansion I/O Rack (B1 and B2).
57
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6-3 Expansion CPU Rack Wiring Example
CPU Backplane
AC
A1 power supply
AC
A2 power supply
AC
B1 power supply
AC
B2 power supply
Expansion CPU Backplane
Expansion I/O Backplane
Ground
58
3-6
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
3-6-4 Expansion I/O Rack Wiring Examples
CPU Backplane
AC
A1 power supply
AC A2 power supply
Expansion I/O Backplane
AC
B1 power supply
AC B2 power supply
Expansion I/O Backplane
Ground
59
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
! WARNING Wire the Units so that a Power Supply Unit can be replaced safely and easily
when the power is ON, and so that power will not be interrupted to other Racks.
To prevent danger when branching the wiring to the terminal blocks of the Power
Supply Units when a Unit is replaced, use repeater terminals for branching, and
provide a circuit-breaker for every Power Supply Unit.
CPU Rack
CP
Tr
AC power
supply A1
Tr
AC power
supply A2
Isolation
transformer
Expansion CPU Rack
CP
Expansion I/O Rack
Tr
AC power
supply B1
Tr
AC power
supply B2
CP
Isolation
transformer
3-6-5 Power Supply Wiring
Use a commercially available 100 to 120-VAC or 200 to 240-VAC power source
to supply power to the AC Power Supply Unit and a 24-VDC power source for the
DC Power Supply Unit. Expansion I/O Racks and Expansion CPU Racks must
also be connected to a power source via a Power Supply Unit. If possible, use
independent power sources for the Racks, input devices, and output devices.
Supply power to the various parts of the system (power equipment, controls, PC
system, and DC I/O, etc.) via separate power supplies.
Always supply power to the CPU Rack and Expansion CPU Rack from the same
power source. If power is supplied from separate sources or if power is not
supplied to the Expansion CPU Rack, the CPU Unit may not operate.
Turn ON the power to the Expansion I/O Racks before turning ON the power to
the CPU Rack.
60
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
The following diagrams show the proper way to connect the power supply to the
Power Supply Unit. The terminals marked “NC” are not connected internally.
AC Power Supply
• Supply 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC.
• Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range,
as follows:
100 to 120 VAC:
200 to 240 VAC:
85 to 132 VAC voltage fluctuation
170 to 264 VAC voltage fluctuation
Screw (M3 self-raising)
Breaker
Isolation
transformer
Breaker
Isolation
transformer
Isolation Transformer
• Noise between the PC and ground can be
significantly reduced by connecting an
isolation transformer. Do not ground the
secondary coil of the transformer.
Power Line
• Use AWG 14 twisted-pair cable
(cross-sectional area: 2 mm2 min.)
! WARNING Wire the Power Supply Unit only to the specified AC voltage. Wiring to the wrong
voltage can cause fires.
! WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while power is being
supplied. Doing either of these may result in electric shock.
! WARNING Tighten the screws on the terminal block for AC power supply to a torque of
0.8 N•m. Loose screws may result in short-circuits, malfunctions, or burning.
! Caution
Abide by the following precautions when wiring the Power Supply Units. Failure
to abide by these precautions may cause malfunctions or damage to the Unit.
• Be sure that no wire clippings or other foreign materials enter the Units when
wiring.
• Provide circuit breakers and other protective devices to protect the system
against external short circuits.
• Check and recheck all wiring before supplying power to the system.
Power Capacity
A CVM1D PC consumes up to 200 VA per Rack. Power consumption varies with
the system configuration (refer to 3-6-10 Current Consumption). When power is
applied, a surge current five times the steady-state current will flow to the PC.
61
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
Terminals Screws and Crimp Terminals
Connect the lead wires to the terminals as shown below. Tighten the screws to a
torque of 0.8 Nm.
20 mm max.
M3.5 self-raising screws.
0.8 N•m torque
Attach solderless type (crimp) terminals to the ends of the lead wires, using terminals having the dimensions shown in the following diagram suitable for M3.5
self-raising screws.
7 mm max.
Note The power supply terminal block is detachable so be sure to check the terminal
block to be sure it is firmly locked in place after wiring the terminals.
! WARNING Always attach crimp terminals to the power supply lines to ensure proper
connection. Connecting loose wires can cause fires.
3-6-6 Grounding
The line ground (LG: ) terminal of the Power Supply Unit is a noise-filtered
neutral terminal. Short the line ground terminal to the ground (GR: ) terminal to
improve noise resistance.
To avoid electrical shock, attach a grounded AWG 14 wire (cross-sectional area
of 2 mm2) to the ground terminal. The ground resistance must be 100 W or less
and must be checked periodically to be sure that environmental conditions have
not deteriorated ground capacity. Do not use a wire longer than 20 m.
PC operation may be adversely affected if the ground wire is shared with other
equipment or if the ground wire is attached to the metal structure of a building.
62
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
When using Expansion I/O Racks, the Racks must also be grounded to the
ground terminal. The same ground can be used for all Racks.
CVM1D-PA208/212
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)
For grounding use 2 mm2
cable. Be sure to keep the
length of the cable less
than 20 meters.
! WARNING Always attach crimp terminals to the ground lines to ensure proper connection.
Connecting loose wires can cause fires.
! Caution
Ground the Power Supply Units separately from other devices.
Note If you suspect that grounding is the cause of operational errors, isolate the Backplanes of the CPU, Expansion CPU, and Expansion I/O Rack from the control
panel before mounting. For methods of isolation, refer to 3-6-9 Using the Noisepreventing Spacers.
63
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
3-6-7 Power Interruptions
A sequence circuit is built into the PC to handle power interruptions. This circuit
prevents malfunctions due to momentary power loss or voltage drops. A timing
diagram for the operation of this circuit is shown below.
85%
Power interruption
Power supply
power interruption detection time: 10 to 25 ms*
Power interruption detection
signal
Shutdown processing
Program execution
Initialization
Normal
Stops
Momentary Power
Interruption Flag
(A40202)
Momentary power interruption time (default: 0 ms)
Normal
Power OFF
interrupt program
Power-ON
interrupt program
Standby
Power retention time: 10 ms (fixed)
CPU Unit reset
signal
RUN output
*0.3 to 1 ms for DC power.
The PC ignores all momentary power interruptions if the interruption lasts no
longer than 10 ms. If the interruption lasts between 10 and 25 ms, the interruption may or may not be detected. If the supply voltage drops below 85% of the
rated voltage for longer than 25 ms (less for the DC Power Supply Unit), a power
interruption detection signal is output and program execution is halted.
If power is not restored within 10 ms (the power retention time) after the power
interruption detection signal is output, the PC stops operating and all outputs are
turned OFF.
If after power interruption detection, power is restored within a period defined as
the momentary power interruption time (default value: 0 ms), the CPU Unit will
resume operation. If the momentary power interruption time elapses and power
has not been restored, the CPU Unit will begin execution of the power OFF interrupt program if one has been programmed. The CPU Unit stops operating after
the lapse of the power retention time (10 ms).
Note The momentary power interruption time for CVM1D PCs is fixed to 0 ms.
Automatic Recovery
64
Operation is resumed automatically when the voltage is restored to more than
85% of the rated value.
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
Interlock Circuits
When the PC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclockwise
operation of a motor, provide an external interlock such as the one shown below
to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning ON at the same
time.
Interlock circuit
00501
MC2
MC1 Motor clockwise
PC
00502
MC1
MC2 Motor counterclockwise
This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being ON at the same
time. Even if the PC is programmed improperly or malfunctions, the motor is protected.
3-6-8 Wiring START Input and RUN Output
The Power Supply Units mounted to the CPU Rack provide a START input and a
RUN output. These terminals can be used to help control system operation.
Power supply
START input
To system
control circuits
RUN output
Emergency stop circuit
65
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
START INPUT wiring (short-circuit) is required for the Power Supply Units on the
CPU Rack. When CVM1D operation is started by an external sequence, the
contacts must be connected so that the START INPUT terminals turn ON for
both Power Supply Units at the same time. If they do not turn ON simultaneously
for both Power Supply Units, an error will be generated.
START Input
START input
The START INPUT terminals are short-circuited at the factory with a short bar.
The short bar can be removed and the terminals wired to a 10-mA, 24-VDC external input to control PC operation. When these terminals are open, PC operation will stop.
Terminals Screws and
Crimp Terminals
Connect the lead wires to the terminals as shown below. Tighten the screws to a
torque of 0.8 N•m max.
20 mm max.
M3.5 self-raising screws.
0.8 N•m torque
Attach solderless type (crimp) terminals to the ends of the lead wires, using terminals having the dimensions shown in the following diagram suitable for M3.5
self-raising screws.
7 mm max.
RUN Output
The RUN output terminals will be ON (closed) when the PC is operating in RUN
or MONITOR mode. These terminals can thus be wired to provide an external
signal indicating the operating status of the PC, such as is used in the emergency stop circuit shown in 3-6-1 Emergency Stop Circuit.
Maximum switching capacity:
250 VAC/2 A (COS φ = 1)
250 VAC/0.5 A (COS φ = 0.4)
24 VDC/2A
! WARNING Always attach crimp terminals to the wires to ensure proper connection.
Connecting loose wires can cause fires.
66
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
! Caution
3-6
Abide by the following precautions when wiring the Power Supply Units. Failure
to abide by these precautions my cause faulty operation or damage to the Unit.
• Be sure that no wire clippings or other foreign materials enter the Units when
wiring.
• Check and recheck all wiring before supplying power to the system.
3-6-9 Using the Noise-preventing Spacers
When using a SYSMAC CVM1, CV500, CV1000, CV2000, or CVM1D PC near a
power device, a operating errors may result due to noise, so be sure to use the
Noise-preventing Spacers. By using Noise-preventing Spacers when mounting
a CPU Backplane, Expansion CPU Backplane, or Expansion I/O Backplane,
you can isolate the Unit from the control panel to prevent external noise.
Noise-preventing Spacers are provided with CV-series Backplanes with the production number 0180 or later (i.e., manufactured 01 August 2000 or later).
Reading the Production Number
01
8
0
Last digit of the year of production (2000 = 0)
Month: Jan. to Sep. = 0 to 9, and Oct. to Dec. = X to Z
Day of production: 1 to 31
If using a Backplane with a production number of 3170 (manufactured 31 July
2000) or earlier, purchase the Noise-preventing Spacers separately using the
following model numbers.
Model
Quantity
CV500-ATT04
50
CV500-ATT05
4
2.0
Isolating a Backplane
11 dia.
9.5 dia.
8.2 dia.
Spacer dimensions
3.7
8.7
Mount one isolating Spacer each in each of the four mounting holes on the Backplane in the direction shown in the following diagram, and then tighten the
screws. The recommended torque is 1.9 N⋅m.
Spacer
Pan head
screw
Control
panel
Backplane
Precautions for Use
• Make sure that the Spacers are mounted in the direction shown above. Mounting in an incorrect direction may result in the device becoming detached.
• When mounting a Backplane using Spacers, the vibration and shock resistance given in the manual can no longer be assured. The mounting height will
67
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
also be raised by approximately 2 mm, so make sure that the front panel of the
Unit, the connector cables, etc., do not touch any other device.
• In an environment where noise occurs, noise from the power supply cable may
also affect the device. Use a noise filter and isolation transformer or similar device to screen the noise.
3-6-10 Current Consumption
The Power Supply Units are limited in the total current they can supply to Units
on the Racks. Make sure that the total current consumption of all the Units on a
Rack does not exceed the maximum available current on the Rack for the Power
Supply Unit being used.
Available Current from Power Supply Units
CPU Racks
The maximum current supplied from the Power Supply Units is as follows:
Power Supply Unit
Available current
(5 VDC)
CVM1D-PA208
8A
CVM1D-PA212
12 A
The current consumption of Units that must be connected to the system is as
follows:
Unit
Model
Current consumption
(5 VDC)
CPU Backplane
CVM1D-BC051
---
CPU Unit
CVM1D-CPU21
1.2 A max. (See note.)
Duplex Unit
I/O Control Unit
CVM1D-DPL01
1.2 A max.
CV500-IC101
CV500-IC201
CV500-IC301
1.3 A max.
1.2 A max.
0.2 A max.
Note Two CPU Units are required for duplex system operations, so double the current
of one CPU Unit when calculating the current consumption.
Expansion CPU Racks
The following power supply and current consumption apply when CVM1D Expansion CPU Racks are used.
The maximum current supplied from the Power Supply Units is as follows:
Power Supply Unit
Available current
(5 VDC)
CVM1D-PA208
8A
CVM1D-PA212
12 A
The current consumption of Units that must be connected to the system is as
follows:
Unit
68
Model
Current consumption
(5 VDC)
Expansion CPU Backplane
CVM1D-BI101
---
I/O Interface Unit
CV500-II101
1.3 A max.
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
The following power supply and current consumption apply when CV-series Expansion CPU Racks are used.
The maximum current supplied from the Power Supply Units is as follows:
Power Supply Unit
Available current
(5 VDC)
CVM1-PA208
8A
CV500-PS221
12 A
CV500-PS211
12 A
The current consumption of Units that must be connected to the system is as
follows:
Unit
Model
Current consumption
(5 VDC)
Expansion CPU Backplane
CVM1D-BI111
---
I/O Interface Unit
CV500-II101
1.3 A max.
Expansion I/O Racks
CVM1D Expansion I/O Racks
The maximum current supplied from the Power Supply Units is as follows:
Power Supply Unit
Available current
(5 VDC)
CVM1D-PA208
8A
CVM1D-PA212
12 A
The current consumption of Units that must be connected to the system is as
follows:
Unit
Model
Current consumption
(5 VDC)
Expansion I/O Backplane
CVM1D-BI102
---
I/O Interface Unit
CV500-II201
1.2 A max.
CV-series Expansion I/O Racks
The maximum current supplied from the Power Supply Units is as follows:
Power Supply Unit
Available current
(5 VDC)
CVM1D-PA208
8A
CV500-PS221
12 A
CV500-PS211
12 A
The current consumption of Units that must be connected to the system is as
follows:
Unit
Model
Expansion I/O Backplane
CV500-BI042
CV500-BI062
CV500-BI114
CV500-II201
I/O Interface Unit
Current consumption
(5 VDC)
------1.2 A max.
C500-series Expansion I/O Racks
The maximum current supplied from the Power Supply Units is as follows:
Power Supply Unit
Available current
(5 VDC)
C500-PS222
7A
C500-PS212
7A
69
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
The current consumption of Units that must be connected to the system is as
follows:
Unit
Slave Racks
Model
Current consumption
(5 VDC)
Expansion I/O Backplane
C500-BI081
---
I/O Interface Unit
C500-II002
0.2 A
The current consumption for Units on Slave Racks is the same as for Expansion
I/O Racks. Add the current consumption for each Slave Unit in the system.
Input Units
Unit
Model
Consumption (A)
DC Input Unit
3G2A5-ID112
0.01
3G2A5-ID114
0.34
3G2A5-ID212
0.3
3G2A5-ID213
0.02
3G2A5-ID215
0.16
3G2A5-ID218
0.26
C500-ID218CN
0.2
3G2A5-ID219
0.34
Input Unit (8-point)
3G2A5-ID216
0.2
AC Input Unit
3G2A5-IA121
0.18
3G2A5-IA222
0.18
C500-IA223
0.18
3G2A5-IA122
0.18
TTL Input Unit
C500-ID501CN
0.2
AC/DC Input Unit
3G2A5-IM211
0.01
3G2A5-IM212
0.2
Output Units
Unit
Contact Output Unit
Transistor Output Unit
Triac Output Unit
70
Model
Consumption (A)
3G2A5-OC221
0.1
3G2A5-OC223
0.1
3G2A5-OC224
0.2
3G2A5-OD211
3G2A5-OD212
3G2A5-OD213
3G2A5-OD215
3G2A5-OD411
3G2A5-OD412
C500-OD217
C500-OD218
C500-OD219
C500-OD414
C500-OD415CN
C500-OA225
0.3
0.23
0.46
0.2
0.16
0.23
0.16
0.23
0.16
0.23
0.23
0.2
C500-OA226
0.45
TTL Output Unit
C500-OD501CN
0.25
DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
C500-MD211CN
0.26
Dummy I/O Unit
3G2A5-DUM01
0.035
Section
Power Supply Unit Wiring
3-6
Special I/O Units
Unit
Analog Input Unit
Analog Output Unit
High-speed
g
Counter Unit
Magnetic Card Reader
Unit
PID Control Unit
Temperature Sensor
U i
Unit
Position Control Unit
Model
Consumption (A)
3G2A5-AD001 to- AD005
0.3
3G2A5-AD006/007
0.75
C500-AD101
0.88
C500-AD501
1.2
3G2A5-DA001 to -DA005
0.55
C500-DA101
1.3
C500-DA501
0.75
3G2A5-CT001
3G2A5-CT012
C500-CT021
C500-CT041
3G2A5-MGC01-E
0.3
0.55
0.35
1.0
1.0
3G2A5-PID01-E
1.4
C500-TS501
C500-TS502
C500-NC113
1.4
1.3
0.75
C500-NC211
0.75
3G2A5-NC103-E
Total 1.4
3G2A5-TU001
3G2A5-NC111-EV1
Total 1.0
3G2A5-TU001
3G2A5-NC121-E
Total 1.7
3G2A5-TU001
C500-NC222-E
Total 1.3
3G2A5-TU002
Cam Positioner Unit
C500-CP131
0.8
Voice Unit
C500-OV001
0.35
ID Sensor Unit
C500-IDSjj
0.4
CRT I/F Unit
C500-GDI11/12
0.6
Ladder Program I/O Unit
C500-LPD01-V1
0.8
ASCII Unit
C500-ASC04
0.27
Fuzzy Logic Unit
C500-FZ001
0.5
CPU Bus Units and Remote I/O Units
Unit
Model
Consumption (A)
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
CV500-SNT31
0.9
SYSMAC LINK Unit
CV500-SLK11/22
0.5
SYSMAC BUS/2
Remote I/O Master Unit
CV500-RM211/221
0.5
CompoBus/D Master
Unit
CVM1-DRM21
0.25
Host Link Unit
CV500-LK201
0.6
Ethernet Unit
CV500-ETN01
1.7
BASIC Unit
CV500-BSC11/21
0.5
CV500-BSC51/61
CV500-BSC31/41
0.3
Personal Computer Unit
CV500-VPjjj-E
2.3
Motion Control Unit
CV500-MC221/421
1.0
71
Section
Wiring I/O Units
Unit
3-7
Model
3-7
Consumption (A)
Temperature Controller
Data Link Unit
CV500-TDL21
0.5
Remote I/O Master Unit
3G2A5-RM001-(P)EV1
0.7
C500-RM201
0.3
I/O Link Unit
3G2A5-LK010-(P)E
0.6
Controller Link Unit
CV500-CLK21
0.3
Wiring I/O Units
3-7-1 I/O Unit Wiring Precautions
Connect the I/O Devices to the I/O Units using AWG 22 lead wire (cross-sectional area: 0.3 mm2) for 19-terminal terminal blocks and AWG 22 to 18 lead wire
(cross-sectional area: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2) for 10-terminal terminal blocks. The terminals have screws with 3.5-mm diameter heads and self-raising pressure
plates. Connect the lead wires to the terminals as shown. Tighten the screws to a
torque of 0.8 N • m.
Attach solderless type (crimp) terminals to the ends of the lead wires. Use terminals having the dimensions shown in the following diagram.
7 mm max.
7 mm max.
! WARNING Always attach crimp terminals to the wires to ensure proper connection.
Connecting loose wires can cause fires.
! Caution
Abide by the following precautions when wiring the I/O Units. Failure to abide by
these precautions my cause faulty operation or damage to the Unit.
• Be sure that no wire clippings or other foreign materials enter the Units when
wiring.
• Recheck all wiring before supplying power to the system.
• Recheck terminal blocks before mounting them to the Unit.
Note
72
1. Putting I/O lines and high-tension lines or power lines in the same duct or
conduit may cause the I/O lines to be affected by noise. This may cause a
malfunction in the Unit or may damage the Unit or I/O devices.
Section
Wiring I/O Units
3-7
2. Use reinforced insulation or double insulation on the DC power supply connected to DC I/O Units when complying with EC directives (low voltage).
3. Use separate power supplies for Relay Output Units and DC I/O Units when
complying with EC directives (low voltage).
Terminal Blocks
The terminal block of an I/O Unit can be removed by loosening the mounting
screws. You do not have to remove the lead wires from the terminal block in order to remove the block from an I/O Unit.
Terminal block mounting screws
Loosen the terminal block mounting screws to remove
the terminal block from the I/O Unit. Make sure the
mounting screws on the terminal block are tightened after wiring is complete and the terminal block is remounted to the I/O Unit.
3-7-2 Input Units
Voltage Inputs
Do not wire voltage inputs as shown on the left below.
Voltage output
Voltage output
Sensor
power
supply
+
+
Output
0V
IN DC input
Output
COM (–)
0V
Incorrect
Input Leakage Current
COM (+)
IN DC input
Sensor
power
supply
Correct
When two-wire sensors, such as photoelectric sensors, proximity sensors or
limit switches with indicators are connected to the PC as input devices, the input
bit may be turned ON erroneously by leakage current. In order to prevent this,
connect a bleeder resistor across the input to reduce the input impedance.
Input
power
supply
Bleeder
resistor
R
PC
Sensor
73
Section
Wiring I/O Units
3-7
If the leakage current is less than 1.3 mA, there should be no problem. If the leakage current is greater than 1.3 mA, determine the value and rating for the bleeder resistor using the following formulas.
I = leakage current in mA
7.2
kW max.
R=
2.4 x I - 3
2.3
W=
W min.
R
I = Leakage current in mA
R = Bleeder resistance (kW)
W = Bleeder resistor wattage (W)
3-7-3 Output Units
Output Short Protection
Output devices and Output Units can be damaged if the load connected to an
output terminal is shorted. Attach a fuse to the output circuit to protect your system. A fuse is recommended even if the Output Unit is provided with an internal
fuse (e.g., Transistor and Triac Output Units), to increase easy of maintenance
and provide extra protection.
Interlock Circuits
When the PC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclockwise
operation of a motor, provide an external interlock such as the one shown below
to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning ON at the same
time.
Interlock circuit
00501
MC2
MC1 Motor clockwise
PC
00502
MC1
MC2 Motor counterclockwise
This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being ON at the same
time. Even if the PC is programmed improperly or malfunctions, the motor is protected.
Output Leakage Current
If a transistor or triac Output Unit is used to drive a low voltage load, the leakage
current may prevent the output device from turning OFF. To prevent this, connect a bleeder resistor in parallel with the load as shown in the following table.
OUT
L
R
Load power supply
PC
Bleeder resistor
COM
Select the bleeder resistor using the following formula.
EON
R
I
where
I = leakage current in mA
R = Bleeder resistance (kW)
Eon = ON voltage of the load
74
Section
Wiring I/O Units
Output Surge Current
3-7
When connecting a Transistor or Triac Output Unit to an output device having a
high surge current (such as an incandescent lamp), care must be taken to avoid
damage to the Output Unit. The Transistor and Triac Output Units are capable of
withstanding a surge current of ten times the rated current. If the surge current
for a particular device exceeds this amount, use one of the following circuit configurations to protect the Output Unit.
OUT
L
R
+
COM
The above circuit protects the Output Unit by letting the load draw a small current
(about one third the rated current) while the output is OFF, significantly reducing
the surge current. The following circuit reduces the surge current by employing a
current-limiting resistor.
R
OUT
L
+
COM
Transistor Output
Residual Voltage
A Transistor Output Unit’s output cannot be directly connected to a TTL input
because of the transistor’s residual voltage. When connecting TTL circuits to
transistor Output Units, connect a pull-up resistor and a CMOS IC between the
two.
3-7-4 Wiring Examples
The following examples illustrate how to connect I/O devices to I/O Units. During
wiring, work slowly and carefully. If an input device is connected to an Output
Unit, damage may result. Check all I/O devices to make sure they meet the specifications. Be sure to allow for leakage currents and load inductance.
Input Units
DC Inputs
Contact output
IN
DC input
COM
75
Section
Wiring I/O Units
Sensor Inputs
When using the following configurations, the sensor and Input Unit should receive their power from the same source.
NPN current output
+
Current
regulator
IN
Output
7 mA
DC input
COM
0V
NPN open-collector output
+
Sensor
Power
Supply
IN
Output
7 mA
DC input
COM
0V
PNP current output
+
Sensor
Power
Supply
Output
IN
AC/DC input
7 mA
COM
0V
AC Inputs
Contact output
IN
AC input
COM
AC Switching
IN
Prox.
switch
main
circuit
76
3-7
COM
AC input
Section
Wiring I/O Units
3-7
3-7-5 I/O Signal Noise Prevention
I/O Signal Lines
Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or
tubes. If placing them together cannot be avoided, use shielded cable to minimize the effects of noise, and connect the shielded end to the GR terminal.
1 = I/O cables
2 = Power cables
Suspended duct
Inductive Load Surge
Suppressor
In-floor duct
Conduits
When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, connect a surge suppressor
or diode in parallel with the load, as shown in the following diagram. The diode
will adsorb the back electromagnetic field generated by the load.
IN
L
DC input
Diode
COM
L
OUT
Relay Output Unit
Triac Output Unit
Surge suppressor
COM
L
OUT
Relay Output Unit
Transistor Output Unit
Diode
+
COM
Surge Suppressor
Resistance:
Capacitor:
Voltage:
50 Ω
0.47mF
200 V
Diode
Leading-edge peak inverse voltage:
Average rectified current:
At least 3 times load voltage
1A
77
Section
Compliance with EC Directives
3-8
3-7-6 External Wiring
If power cables carrying more than 10 A at 400 V or 20 A at 220 V must be run
parallel to I/O wiring, leave at least 300 mm between the power cables and the
I/O wiring, as shown in the following diagram.
Low current cables
1
300 mm min.
Control cables
2
Power cables
300 mm min.
3
Grounding at resistance
of less than 100 W
1 = I/O wiring
2 = General control wiring
3 = Power cables
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct (for example,
where they are connected to the equipment), shield them from each other using
grounded metal plates.
Metal plate (iron)
200 mm min.
1
2
3
Grounding at resistance
of less than 100 W
1 = I/O wiring
2 = General control wiring
3 = Power cables
3-8
Compliance with EC Directives
The following precautions must be abided by when installing CVM1D PCs to
meet EC Directives.
1, 2, 3...
1. CVM1D PCs are classified as open-structure devices and must be installed
inside a control panel.
2. Use reinforced insulation or double insulation on the DC power supply connected to CV500-PS211 Power Supply Unit and DC I/O Units.
3. Use separate power supplies for Relay Output Units and DC I/O Units.
4. The maximum switching capacity of the CV500-PS211 Power Supply Unit is
2 A at 24 VDC when complying with EC Directives (low-voltage directives).
78
Section
Compliance with EC Directives
3-8
5. CVM1D PCs that meet EC Directives meet the common emission standard
(EN50081-2) of the EMC Directives as individual products. When assembled into machinery, however, the noise generated by switching relay
outputs can fail to meet the standard. When noise is excessive, surge killers
must be installed or other measures must be taken outside of the PC. The
measures required to meet the standard will vary with the load being driven,
wiring, the configuration of the machinery, etc.
The following examples show means of reducing noise. These means will
only reduce the amount of noise and will not eliminate noise. They are provided here as examples only.
Requirements
The following conditions can be used to determine if measures to reduce noise
are necessary. Refer to the EN50081-2 Standard for details.
• If the loads of the devices into which the PC is built are switched less than 5
times a minute, then no measures need to be taken.
• If the loads of the devices into which the PC is built are switched 5 times or
more a minute, then measures need to be taken.
Examples
Inductive Load Surge
Suppressor
Connect a surge suppressor or diode in parallel with the load, as shown in the
following diagrams, when switching inductive loads.
CR Method (AC or DC)
The reset time will be increased if the load is a relay, solenoid, or similar device.
Connect the CR between the load connections for 24-V and 48-V power supply
voltages and between the contact connections for 100 to 200-V power supply
voltages.
The capacitor and resistors can be based on the following guidelines.
C:
R:
0.5 to 1 µF for each amp of contact current
0.5 to 1 Ω for each volt of contact voltage.
You will need to adjust the above values depending on the characteristics of the
load, relay, etc., based on the discharge suppression of the capacitor when the
contacts are open and the current control effect of the resistor the next time the
circuit is closed.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor generally needs to be between 200 and
300 V. Use an AC capacitor (without polarity) in an AC circuit.
Inductive load
C
R
Power supply
Diode Method (DC Only)
The energy stored in the coil is impressed on the coil as a current by the action of
the parallel diode and converted to Joule heat by the resistance of the inductive
load. Here, the reset time will be increased even more than for the CR method.
79
Section
Compliance with EC Directives
3-8
The reverse dielectric strength of the diode must be 10 times the circuit voltage
and the forward current must be at least as high as that of the load. If the circuit
voltage is low enough, as it is for most electronic circuits, then the reverse dielectric strength of the diode can be as low as 2 to 3 times the circuit voltage.
Inductive load
Power supply
Varistor (AC or DC)
The method uses the fixed voltage characteristics of a varistor to prevent high
voltages from being applied to the contacts. Here, as well, the reset time will be
increase somewhat.
Connect the varistor between the load connections for 24-V and 48-V power
supply voltages and between the contact connections for 100 to 200-V power
supply voltages.
Inductive load
Power supply
Output Surge Current
When connecting an output device having a high surge current (such as an incandescent lamp), use one of the following circuit configurations to protect the
Output Unit.
The following circuit lets the load draw a small current (about one third the rated
current) while the output is OFF, significantly reducing the surge current.
OUT
L
R
+
COM
The following circuit reduces the surge current by employing a current-limiting
resistor.
R
OUT
COM
80
L
+
SECTION 4
System Startup and Trial Operation
This section describes procedures for the starting up the system and performing trial operation.
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
System Startup Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Check Points before Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Startup of the Simplex System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparations for Trial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
Section
System Startup Preparations
4-1
4-1
System Startup Preparations
4-1-1 Check Points before Startup
After mounting the CVM1D Units and completing necessary wiring, check the
following points to prepare for trial operation.
Installation
• Is the Backplane firmly secured?
• Are all the Units securely mounted?
• Are all the mounting screws securely tightened?
• Is a battery installed in the CPU Unit? (When using an EM Unit and Memory
Card, check specifications and installation conditions.)
Refer to 3-3 Installation.
Switch Setting
Connection of Cables
and Connectors
Are Unit DIP switches properly set?
Refer to Section 4 System Startup and Trial Operation.
• Are the cables properly connected between Racks? Are the connectors properly locked?
• Are the cables properly connected between Units?
• Is a Terminating Resistor Unit connected to the I/O Control Unit on the last Expansion I/O Rack?
Refer to 3-4 Rack Connections.
Wiring
• Are both the power supply wiring and ground wiring correct?
• Are the START INPUT and PC RUN OUTPUT of the Duplex Unit properly
wired?
• Are the I/O wirings correct?
• Are the terminal block screws tightened to the specified torque?
Refer to 3-6 Power Supply Unit Wiring and 3-7 Wring I/O Units.
Memory Card
(If Required)
Check the following items when using a duplex system.
• Is the EM Unit mounted in the active CPU Unit?
• When one Memory Card is installed in the active CPU Unit and another in the
standby CPU Unit, is the program the same in both Memory Cards?
Refer to page 33.
EM Unit (If Required)
Check the following items when using a duplex system.
• Do the EM Units mounted in both CPU Units have the same specifications?
Refer to page 33.
82
Section
System Startup Preparations
4-1
4-1-2 Startup Procedure
The CVM1D can be operated either in duplex mode or simplex mode. Start up
the system according to the mode.
Startup
Check the mounting conditions, wirings, switch
settings, cable connections, etc.
Select the operation mode.
Duplex mode?
No
Simplex mode
Yes
Duplex mode
Set the DPL/SPL Switch to SPL.
Set the DPL/SPL Switch to DPL.
Set the ACTIVE Switch to ACT. LEFT or
ACT. RIGHT.
Set the ACTIVE Switch to the side where
the CPU Unit is mounted (ACT. LEFT or
ACT. RIGHT).
Refer to
Section
4-2.
Refer to
Section
4-3.
Set both CPU Switches to CPU USE.
Set the CPU Switch on the side where the
CPU Unit is mounted to CPU USE.
Turn ON the power.
Create an I/O table.
Write the program.
Refer to
Section
4-4.
Read and verify the program.
Start trial operation.
83
Section
Duplex System Startup
4-2
4-2
Duplex System Startup
To start up a duplex system, first set the CPU Units and Duplex Unit according to
the following procedure with the power turned OFF.
Setting the CPU Unit
For the CPU Unit, no particular switch settings are required. When using Expansion DM, mount an EM Unit. When using file memory, install a Memory Card.
1, 2, 3...
1. The SYSTEM PROTECT Key is provided to protect programs. If the program doesn’t need to be protected, set the SYSTEM PROTECT Key to
NORMAL.
2. Mount an EM Unit. (Refer to page 33.)
ON 1
2
3
4 5
6
3. Set the DIP switch for the PC Setup. (Refer to page 32.)
OFF
ON
4. Install a Memory Card. (Refer to page 33.)
84
Section
Duplex System Startup
4-2
Setting the Duplex Unit
5. Set both CPU Switches to CPU USE.
6. Set the DPL/SPL Switch to DPL (duplex mode).
7. Set the ACTIVE Switch to either ACT. LEFT or ACT. RIGHT depending on
which CPU Unit is to be used for normal operation.
8. Set the Host Link Communications Switch to either RS-232 or RS-422 depending on which Host Link connector is to be used.
9. Set the Communications Setting Switch to the communications specifications of the Host Link connector. Refer to page 32 for details on DIP switch
settings.
10. Connect the HOST LINK connector to the RS-232/422 line of the host computer or PT if a connection is to be used.
85
Duplex System Startup
Section
4-2
11. Connect a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console or the
SYSMAC Support Software, to the PERIPHERAL connector.
Turning ON the Power
The indicators will appear as shown in the User program transfer/verification
column on page 92 right after the power is turned ON and then change to the
status as shown in the Power ON (After duplex initialization) column.
Note When the program contents of both CPU Units change, such as when the CPU
Units are replaced, the indicator will change to the status for a Duplex Verification Error. Refer to 6-2 Error Indicators.
12. Use the INIT (initialization) switch to initialize Duplex mode. It takes approximately 10 seconds to complete this initialization without an EM Unit. When
changing the CPU Unit Switches, press the INIT switch to used the new settings.
When the CPU Units and Duplex Unit settings have been completed, refer to 4-4
Preparations for Trial Operation.
86
Section
Startup of the Simplex System
4-3
4-3
Startup of the Simplex System
In simplex mode, the system is controlled by only one CPU Unit. The CPU Unit
can be mounted to the slot on either the right or left side of the Duplex Unit.
Use the following procedure to start up the system.
Setting the CPU Unit
No particular switch settings are required for the CPU Unit. When using Expansion DM, mount an EM Unit. When using File Memory, install a Memory Card.
1. The SYSTEM PROTECT Key is provided to protect programs. If the program doesn’t need to be protected, set the SYSTEM PROTECT Key to
NORMAL.
2. Mount an EM Unit. (Refer to page 33.)
2
3
4 5
6
3. Set the DIP switch for PC Setup. (Refer to page 32.)
ON 1
1, 2, 3...
OFF
ON
4. Install a Memory Card. (Refer to page 33.)
87
Section
Startup of the Simplex System
4-3
Setting the Duplex Unit
5. Set the CPU Switch for the CPU Unit to be mounted to CPU USE.
6. Set the DPL/SPL Switch to SPL (simplex mode).
7. Set the ACTIVE Switch to either ACT. LEFT or ACT. RIGHT depending on
the side to which the CPU Unit is mounted.
8. Set the Host Link Communications Switch to either RS-232 or RS-422 depending on which Host Link connector is to be used.
9. Set the Communications Setting Switch to the communications specifications of the Host Link connector. Refer to page 32 for details on DIP switch
settings.
10. Connect the HOST LINK connector to the RS-232/422 line of the host computer or PT if one of these is to be used.
88
Section
Preparations for Trial Operation
4-4
11. Connect a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console or the
SYSMAC Support Software, to the PERIPHERAL connector.
The indicators will be as shown in the “Power ON” column on page 93 right after
the power is turned ON.
When the CPU Unit and Duplex Unit settings have been completed, refer to 4-4
Preparations for Trial Operation.
Turning ON the Power
4-4
Preparations for Trial Operation
Setting Expansion Rack
Numbers
Set the rack numbers (No. 1 to 7) for the Expansion Racks using the I/O Interface
Unit on each Rack.
• Refer to the CVM1D Duplex System Operation Manual (W351) for details on
word allocations.
• Make sure not to use the same number twice.
The rack number set when the power is turned ON remains in effect until the
power is turned OFF and then ON again.
Creating an I/O Table
Create an I/O table after completing wiring, switch settings, and connection of
Programming Devices, such as the Programming Console or SYSMAC Support
Software.
Mount all the I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units to be used. Turn
ON the power with the START INPUT left open and then set to PROGRAM mode
using a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console.
The following procedure is a brief description of how an I/O table is created using
the Programming Console. For details, refer to CVM1-PRS21-EV1 Programming Console Operation Manual (W222) and other applicable manuals.
1, 2, 3...
1. Connect the Programming Console, set the PROGRAM mode, and then
turn ON the power supply.
Screen display when the power is turned ON
CVM1ĆPRS21ĆV1 20
Mon time:10sec
Message #: 0
Read Setup Yes
Note Use version 2.0 or later for the CVM1D.
89
Section
Preparations for Trial Operation
4-4
2. Change to the I/O table create menu.
CVM1DĆCPU21
CLR
000000 PRG
CLR
I/O table create screen
FUN
SHIFT
I/O table
0:Create
1:Compare
2:Replace I/O
CH
3. Select 0:Create.
Password input screen for creating an I/O table.
I/O table Create
????
0
4. Input the password 9713.
9
WRITE
7
1
3
I/O table Create
9713
I/O table Create
Clear CPU BUnit?
0:Clear
1:Hold
5. Select 0:Clear to start I/O table creation.
I/O table creation completion screen
0
I/O table Create
Clear CPU BUnit
OK
6. When an I/O table has been created, verify the table and check word allocation for each Unit. For further details, refer to CVM1-PRS21-EV1 Programming Console Operation Manual (W222) or other relevant manuals.
90
Preparations for Trial Operation
Writing Programs
Section
4-4
When registration in the I/O table has been finished, make sure that the I/O
words allocated to each Unit match the addresses used in the user program.
Create the ladder program using a Programming Device and transfer the data to
the CVM1D.
Note Although the Programming Device is connected to the Duplex Unit, writing is
performed for the active CPU Unit. By pressing the INIT switch, the same program or data can be written to the standby CPU Unit in simplex mode.
Trial Operation
When all the startup preparations have been completed, start trial operation.
Turn OFF the power once and perform the following before starting.
• Detach the output wires so that the system will not be affected by any faulty
operation.
• Short-circuit the START INPUT on each of the two Power Supply Units for the
CPU Units.
• If a Communications Unit is mounted, provide appropriate measures to prevent any influence on other systems.
91
Section
Preparations for Trial Operation
Indicators When Power is
Turned ON
4-4
The indicators on every Unit will be as shown in the following table during duplex
system operation, immediately after powerup, and when duplex initialization
has been performed.
Unit
Duplex
Unit
Status
Power ON
(After duplex
initialization)
User
program
transfer/
verification
PROGRAM
mode
Duplex
system in
operation
Description
DPL RUN
Lit
Flashing
Lit
Lit
Lit while both the active and standby
CPU Units are operating normally in synchronization. Also lit in PROGRAM
mode.
DPL BUS ERR
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when a bus error occurs in the duplex
system.
VERIFY ERR
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when the program or memory in one
of the CPU Units does not match that of
the other Unit. (Check UM, EEP-ROM,
file memory, protect key, and EM size)
One lit; the other not lit.
lit
One lit; the
other not lit.
lit
One lit; the
other not lit.
lit
One lit;
the other
not lit.
Indicator on the CPU Unit set to ACTIVE
(controlling the system) is lit.
lit
CPU
ACTIVE
Left
RUN
Left
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit during operation (in MONITOR mode
or RUN mode).
)
Right
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
In Duplex mode, the indicators on both
CPU Units are lit.
Left
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit in Duplex mode under the following
conditions.
WAIT
Right
S Either transferring or verifying (including UM protect) data in the UM, EEPROM, Memory Card, expansion data
memory, or IOM (I/O memory).
Right
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
S START INPUT or power to Slave Rack
is not turned ON.
S Operation startup error (duplex bus error or duplex verification error) has occurred.
PROGRAM
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Right
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Left
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Right
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Left
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Right
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Left
One lit; the other not lit.
lit
One lit; the
other not lit.
lit
One lit; the
other not lit.
lit
One lit;
the other
not lit.
Indicates which CPU Unit is connected to
the Host Link or a Programming Device.
Device
POWER
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit while power (5 VDC) is supplied to the
CPU Unit.
RUN
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit while the CPU Unit is processing program in RUN or MONITOR mode.
ERROR
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when the CPU Unit detects an fatal
error (such as memory error).
WDT
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when a watchdog timer error is detected.
ALARM
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when non-fatal error is detected.
OUTINH
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when Load OFF Bit (A00015) is
turned ON.
COMM.
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit while communications take place with
the host computer.
CPU ERR
MEM. ERR
PERIPHERAL
HOST LINK
Left
CPU
92
Lit when the CPU Unit is set to PROGRAM mode.
Left
Right
Both indicators are lit in Duplex mode.
Lit when an error occurs in the CPU Unit.
Lit when an error occurs in the internal
memory, Memory
M
Card,
C d or the
h EM Unit.
U i
Section
Preparations for Trial Operation
Right
g
CPU
Power ON
(After duplex
initialization)
Status
Unit
Duplex
system in
operation
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
RUN
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
ERROR
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
WDT
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
ALARM
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
OUTINH
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
COMM.
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Unit
Description
Same as the above.
The indicators for each Unit will be as shown in the following table during simplex
system operation.
Status
Power
ON
Simplex
system
operation
Program
mode
Load
shutdown
Description
Always
y OFF in Simplex mode.
DPL RUN
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
DPL BUS ERR
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
VERIFY ERR
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Left
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Right
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Left
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Right
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit during
g operation (in
( MONITOR mode or RUN
mode).
d )
Left
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Always
y OFF in Simplex mode.
Right
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Left
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Right
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when the CPU Unit is set to PROGRAM
mode.
d
Left
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when an error occurs in the CPU Unit.
Right
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Left
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Right
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Left
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Right
CPU ACTIVE
RUN
WAIT
PROGRAM
CPU ERR
MEM. ERR
PERIPHERAL
HOST LINK
CPU
PROGRAM
mode
POWER
Indicators in Simplex
Mode
Duplex
p
U it
Unit
User
program
transfer/
verification
4-4
LED on the side the CPU Unit is mounted is lit.
Lit when an error occurs in the internal memory,
y,
M
Memory
Card,
C d or EM Unit.
U i
Indicates which CPU Unit is connected to the
H
Li k or P
i D
i
Host
Link
Programming
Device.
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
POWER
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit while power (5 VDC) is supplied to the CPU
Unit.
RUN
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit while the CPU Unit is processing program in
RUN or MONITOR mode.
ERROR
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when the CPU Unit detects an fatal error
(such as memory error).
WDT
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when a watchdog timer error is detected.
ALARM
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit when non-fatal error is detected.
OUTINH
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit when Load OFF Bit (A00015) turns ON.
COMM.
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit while communications are taking place with
the host computer.
93
SECTION 5
Inspection and Maintenance
This section describes the procedures necessary for periodic inspection and maintenance.
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
Consumable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Unit Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1 Data Output to AR Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2 Online Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3 Replacing Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-4 Replacing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-2 Replacing a CPU Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-3 Replacing a Memory Card Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
Section
Inspections
5-1
5-2
Consumable Parts
It is recommended that a spare Unit always be kept on hand to ensure continued
smooth operations in case a Unit should need to be replaced. In addition, the
following consumable parts should always be kept available.
• Backup battery for CPU Unit: C500-BAT08
Be sure to have a replacement battery ready before the currently installed battery reaches the end of its service life.
• Fuses for Output Units
• Output relays for Contact-type Output Units
Note Always keep spare items on hand so that they can be used as immediate replacements.
5-2
Inspections
The main components of a SYSMAC PC are semiconductors, and there are few
consumable parts. Environmental conditions, however, can lead to electrical
element deterioration, so regular inspections are required.
The standard period for inspections is six months to one year, but more frequent
inspections may be required depending on the operating environment.
Inspection item
Details
Criteria
Remarks
1
Power supply
Determine whether the voltage
fluctuation is within the standard
at the power supply terminal.
100 VAC (85 to 132 VAC)
200 VAC (170 to 264 VAC)
Tester
2
Environmental
conditions
Is the ambient temperature inside
the panel appropriate?
0 to 55_C
Thermometer
Is the ambient humidity inside the
panel appropriate?
10% to 90% RH with no
condensation
Hydroscope
Has dirt or dust collected?
Is the voltage fluctuation
measured at the I/O terminal
within the standard range?
None
Visual inspection
Must conform to the specifications Tester
for individual Units.
Are all units securely installed?
Are all connection cables and
connectors inserted completely
and locked?
Nothing is loose
Nothing is loose
Are any of the external wiring
screws loose?
Nothing is loose
Are any of the external wiring
cables frayed?
No external abnormalities
Visual inspection
Power Supply Unit
POWER indicator must be lit on
both Units.
Visual inspection
CPU Unit
POWER indicator must be lit on
both Units.
3
I/O power supply
4
Installation status
5
6
Unit condition
Product service life
Output Unit (Relay)
The ERR indicator must not be lit.
Electrical:
Resistance load: 300,000
operations
Inductive load: 100,000
operations
Tighten
with
g
di
screwdriver.
---
Mechanical: 5,000,000 operations
CPU Unit battery
96
---
Section
I/O Unit Online Replacement
5-3
Handling Precautions
Turn the power OFF before replacing the Unit.
If a Unit is found to be faulty and is replaced, check the new Unit to make sure
there is no error.
When returning a faulty Unit for repair, make a detailed note of the Unit’s malfunction and take it with the Unit to the nearest OMRON office or sales representative.
If a contact is faulty, put some industrial alcohol on a clean cotton cloth and wipe
the surface. Then install the Unit.
Required Tools and
Equipment
Standard Tools
• Screwdrivers (Phillips and flat-blade)
• Voltage tester or digital voltage meter
• Industrial alcohol and a cotton cloth
Measurement Devices
• Synchroscope
• Cathode-ray oscilloscope
• Thermometer, hydroscope
5-3
I/O Unit Online Replacement
Online replacement is a function that allows I/O Units to be replaced without
stopping PC operation.
Online Replacement Restrictions
Item
Applicable Units
Details
Number of Units
8/16/32/64-pt. I/O Units (Not possible for Interrupt Input Units,
Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, or Communications Units.)
Only one Unit on one Rack can be replaced for each operation.
Racks
S CPU Rack (when CVM1D-BC051 CPU Backplane is used)
S Expansion CPU Rack (when CVM1D-BI101 Expansion CPU
Backplane is used)
S Expansion I/O Rack (when CVM1D-BI102 Expansion I/O
Backplane is used)
Programming
Device
Execution modes
CVM1-PRS21-EV1 Programming Console
Duplex mode, simplex mode
During online replacement, the inputs and outputs of the Unit being replaced are
stopped, and I/O data is not refreshed for that Rack. Set the I/O status is to either
be cleared or saved while the Programming Console is performing online replacement operations.
97
Section
I/O Unit Online Replacement
5-3
The I/O online replacement conditions can be read at the display of an I/O Control Unit or I/O Interface Unit mounted on that Rack.
CV500-IC101/IC201/IC301
I/O Control Unit
CV500-II101/II201
I/O Interface Unit
Display
Display contents
Slot number of replacement
Mode 1
Rack
5-3-1 Data Output to AR Area
During online replacement, the I/O online replacement conditions are output to
word A399 in the AR Area, as shown in the following table.
Word A399: I/O Online Replacement Conditions
Word
A399
Bits
Output contents
00 to 07
Slot number (Rack position) of replaced Unit: 00 to 09 (2 digits
BCD)
08 to 11
12 to 13
14
Slot number (Rack) of replaced Unit: 0 to 7 (1 digit BCD)
Not used. (Reserved for system.)
Data contents of I/O Units
0: Clear
other than replaced Unit.
1: Save
15
I/O online replacement status
0: Not I/O online replacement
1: I/O online replacement
5-3-2 Online Replacement Procedure
! Caution
Use version 2.0 or later of the Programming Console for the CVM1D. Online Unit
replacement is not supported by and error messages unique to the CVM1D will
not be displayed with earlier versions.
1, 2, 3...
1. Connect the CVM1-PRS21-EV1 Programming Console to the Duplex Unit,
and prepare an I/O Unit of the same model as the one to be replaced.
2. Bring up the Programming Console’s initial screen.
CLR
000000 PRG
MONTR
3. Read the display for creating the I/O table.
FUN
98
SHIFT
CH
I/O Table
0:Create
1:Compare
2:Replace I/O
Section
I/O Unit Online Replacement
5-3
4. Select 2: Replace I/O.
2
Replace I/O
Rack?
Slot?
?
Replace I/O
Rack
5
Slot
?
?
5. Specify the rack number.
5
The rack number for the CPU Rack is 0. The rack numbers for the Expansion
Racks are 1 to 7, and is set on the I/O Interface Unit.
6. Specify the slot number.
8
(Beginning with 0, in order
from the left side of the
Rack.)
Replace I/O
Rack5
Slot8
?
Slot No. 8
Confirm that
this is Rack No. 5.
7. Press the SRCH Key to display the classification of the mounted Unit.
SRCH
Replace I/O ?
Rack5
Slot8
OO**
Unit Classification Display
Unit
16 pts
32 pts
64 pts
Input
I***
II**
IIII
Output
O***
OO * *
OOOO
8. Press the DEL Key to display the selection screen for saving or clearing output data to other Output Units on the Rack.
DEL
Replace I/O St
Rack OUT ?
0:Clear
1:Hold
?
99
Section
I/O Unit Online Replacement
5-3
9. Select 1: Hold to save the data.
1
Replace I/O St
Rack OUT
?
10. Press the Up Cursor Key to replace the Output Unit.
Replace I/O ?
Rack5
Slot8
J
OO**
Output data will not be refreshed after this key is pressed.
11. Disconnect the Output Unit at the connector terminals, and then replace it.
Slot No. 8
32-pt. output
32-pt. output
Be careful to insert the replacement Unit in the proper position and direction
for mounting to the connector terminals.
12. After the Unit has been replaced, press the INS Key and then the Down Cursor Key to end the operation.
INS
Replace I/O End?
Rack5
Slot8
J
OO**
Replace I/O ?
Rack5
Slot8
OO**
After this key is pressed, output data will be refreshed again.
100
Section
I/O Unit Online Replacement
5-3
5-3-3 Replacing Fuses
To replace a fuse in an Output Unit, take the following steps. Use the following
fuses.
Unit
1, 2, 3...
Fuse specifications
C500-OD411, C500-OD217, and
C500-OA223
C500-OA121 or C500-OA222
250 V, 5 A
MF51SH (JIS), 20 mm x 5.2 mm dia.
250 V, 5 A
Model SS2 (SOC Corporation),
32 mm x 6.35 mm dia.
C500-OD219
250 V, 10 A
GGL-10 (Nagasawa Electric)
1. Turn off the power to the PC.
2. Detach the terminal block from the Output Unit by removing the screws located at the top and bottom of the terminal block.
Mounting screws
Located at the top and bottom.
Terminal block mounting screws
Located at the top and bottom of the
terminal block.
Cover mounting screws (8)
3. Remove the screws that mount the Output Unit to the Backplane. Pull the
Output Unit toward you and remove it from the Backplane.
4. There are eight screws on each side of the Output Unit. Remove these
screws to detach the case from the cover.
5. Pull out the printed circuit board.
6. Replace the fuse with a new one.
7. Reassemble the Unit.
5-3-4 Replacing Relays
To replace a Relay in an Output Unit, take the following steps. Use the following
relays.
Unit
C500-OD221, C500-OD223, and
C500-OD224
1, 2, 3...
Fuse specifications
G6B-1174P-FD-US-M, 24 VDC
1. Turn off the power to the PC.
101
Section
I/O Unit Online Replacement
5-3
2. Detach the terminal block from the Output Unit, by removing the screws located at the top and bottom of the terminal block.
Mounting screws
Located at the top and bottom.
Terminal block mounting screws
Located at the top and bottom of the
terminal block.
Cover mounting screws (8)
3. Remove the screws that mount the Output Unit to the Backplane. Pulling the
Unit toward you, remove the Output Unit from the Backplane.
4. There are eight screws on each side of the Output Unit. Remove these
screws to detach the case from the cover.
5. Pull out the printed circuit board.
6. Use the Relay Puller to pull out the Relay. Insert a new Relay.
7. Reassemble the Unit.
Note To remove the relay, use the P6B-Y1 Relay Puller. Be sure to insert the relay in
the socket in the correct direction. The relay cannot be inserted in the wrong direction and if excessive force is applied to the relay, the pins of the relay may
bend. The locations of relays on the PC boards are illustrated in the following
figures.
Connector
C500-OC221/223
Indicators
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
102
Terminal block
4
Section
Replacing a CPU Unit
5-4
C500-OC224
0
1
I (Wd n)
5-4
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
0
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
8
II (Wd n+1)
Replacing a CPU Unit
In a duplex system, even if the CPU Unit is damaged while running, a standby
CPU Unit continues operations. The defective CPU Unit should be quickly replaced in order to return to duplex mode operation.
5-4-1 Replacement Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Set the CPU usage switch at the Unit to be replaced to “NO USE.” When the
power supply is turned OFF, check to be sure that the CPU Unit’s POWER
indicator is not lit.
In this example, the CPU Unit on the right is damaged, and the CPU Unit on
the left has switched to operating in simplex mode.
Operating
Damaged
POWER indicator is not lit after the
power is turned OFF.
Set the CPU usage switch to “NO USE.”
2. Replace the defective CPU Unit with a new one.
Make sure that the settings on the new CPU Unit are the same as those of
the one being replaced.
• Use the same number of EM banks.
103
Section
Replacing a CPU Unit
5-4
• Use the same Memory Card and duplex switch settings.
3. Set the CPU usage switch on the replacement CPU Unit to “CPU USE.” The
POWER indicator on the replacement CPU Unit should light when the power supply is turned ON.
Operating
Replacement
Turn ON the CPU Unit’s power supply
switch. Set the CPU usage switch to
“CPU USE.” The POWER indicator
should be lit.
4. When an error occurs at a CPU Unit in a duplex system, operation switches
to simplex mode using only the normal CPU Unit. The program and automatic data transfers cannot be resumed merely by replacing the defective
CPU Unit. Operation will continue in simplex mode, and will not switch over if
an error occurs at the CPU Unit that is still operating. To return to duplex
mode operation, it is necessary to press the Initialize Button. When that
switch is pressed, the program and data will be transferred from the active
(ACT) CPU Unit to the standby (STB) CPU Unit. (This takes approximately
10 seconds without EM).
• Set the replacement CPU Unit to CPU USE.
(1)
• Check to make sure that the mode is “DPL.”
(2)
• Press the Initialize Button.
(3)
When the Initialize Button is pressed, operation will switch back to duplex
mode.
104
Section
Replacing a CPU Unit
5-4
After setting the CPU usage switch to CPU USE, wait at least three seconds
before pressing the Initialize Button. The CPU’s internal processing takes
approximately three seconds after the switch is set to CPU USE, so the Initialize Button will not be effective during that interval.
5-4-2 Replacing a CPU Battery
When the battery is nearly discharged, the ALARM indicator will blink, bit
A42615 will turn ON, and the message “BATT LOW” will appear on the Programming Device. In duplex mode, bit A42613 will turn ON when the battery is low in
the active CPU Unit, and bit A42611 will turn ON if it is low in the standby CPU
Unit.
When this occurs, replace the battery within one week to avoid loss of data. The
battery and connector are provided as a set. To replace the Battery Set, follow
the steps below. The entire replacement must be completed within five minutes
to ensure that the data will not be lost.
! Caution
Do not short circuit, charge, disassemble, or expose the battery to heat. The battery fluid is flammable and if mishandled, may cause a fire or explosion. Do not
incinerate the battery after use.
105
Section
Replacing a CPU Unit
5-4
The maximum expected service life of the battery is five years for any CPU Unit;
the actual service life depends on how much it is used for supplying power to the
CPU Unit. The memory backup times are given in the following table.
Backup time without power supplied
Guaranteed value
2,900 hours (approx. 0.3 year)
Effective value
43,000 hours (approx. 5 years)
Guaranteed value:
Memory backup time without power supplied at 55°C.
Effective value:
Memory backup time without power supplied at 25°C.
Total
power
supply
time
(years)
Approx. 4.4 yr
With EM Unit
Without EM Unit
Approx. 1 yr
Approx. 0.6 yr
Approx. 2.3 yr
Approx. 0.3 yr
Ambient temperature (°C)
Battery Replacement
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn ON power to the PC (if not on yet).
2. Wait for at least 10 seconds after turning ON power and then turn OFF power to the PC. (Although the battery can be replaced while power is being
applied to the PC, it is not recommended, as short-circuiting is likely to occur.)
3. Remove the cover from the battery compartment.
4. Remove the old Battery Set.
5. Install the new Battery Set as shown below.
Battery connector
Battery holder
Battery Set C500-BAT08
6. Replace the cover of the battery compartment.
7. When a Programming Console is mounted to the CPU after the battery has
been replaced, “BATT LOW” will be displayed. This message can be
cleared by pressing CLR, FUN, MONTR, or just turning the power to the PC
OFF and ON again.
106
Section
Replacing a CPU Unit
5-4
Note The maximum life of the battery is five years, regardless of whether power is
supplied to the CPU. The memory backup duration when power is not supplied
to the CPU varies with the ambient temperature. Details regarding the service
life of the battery are provided in Appendix B Specifications.
5-4-3 Replacing a Memory Card Battery
The RAM Memory Card is provided with a backup memory battery.
When the Memory Card is mounted to the CPU and the battery life is close to
expiring, the CPU ALARM indicator will blink, bit A42614 will turn ON, and the
message “BATT LOW” will appear on the Programming Device. In duplex mode,
bit A42612 will turn ON when the battery is low in the active Memory Card, and bit
A42610 will turn ON if it is low in the standby Memory Card.
When this occurs, replace the battery within one week to avoid loss of data. The
entire replacement must be completed within one minute to ensure that the data
will not be lost.
Use one of the following replacement batteries.
Model
! Caution
Capacity
Battery life
HMC-ES641
64 Kbytes
5 years
HMC-ES151
128 Kbytes
2 years
HMC-ES251
256 Kbytes
1 years
HMC-ES551
512 Kbytes
0.5 years
Do not short circuit, charge, disassemble, or expose the lithium battery to heat.
The battery fluid is flammable and if mishandled, may cause a fire or explosion.
Do not incinerate the battery after use.
Battery Replacement
Battery case
Slot
! Caution
Steps 4 through 7 of the following procedure must be completed within one minute. If the new battery is not inserted within one minute, the contents of memory
will be lost.
1, 2, 3...
1. If the Memory Card (M/C) indicator is not lit, press the Memory Card power
supply switch to turn ON power to the Memory Card and leave it ON for at
least 10 seconds.
2. Press the Memory Card power supply switch to turn OFF the Memory Card
indicator.
3. Press the Memory Card eject button and remove the Memory Card.
4. Release the battery case by inserting the tip of a pen (or similar object) in the
slot on the side of the Memory Card as shown.
5. Remove the old battery from the case.
107
Section
Replacing a Power Supply Unit
5-5
6. Install the new battery as shown, with the positive terminal to the top.
Battery case
Battery
7. Insert the battery case back into the Memory Card. Be sure that the case is
installed all the way in.
5-5
Replacing a Power Supply Unit
With the CVM1D’s redundant power supply system, if either Power Supply Unit
fails it can be replaced without interrupting system operation.
Online Replacement Restrictions
Item
Details
Applicable Racks
S CPU Rack (when CVM1D-BC051 CPU Backplane is used)
S Expansion CPU Rack (when CVM1D-BI101 Expansion CPU
Backplane is used)
S Expansion I/O Rack (when CVM1D-BI102 Expansion I/O
Backplane is used)
Power Supply Unit
error detection
Power Supply Unit
error output
Power Supply Unit
error display
Error Display
S Detection of 5-VDC-output voltage drop
S Detection of disagreement between START INPUT
terminals for the two Power Supply Units on the CPU Rack.
Errors at Power Supply Units on CPU Racks, Expansion CPU
Racks, and Expansion I/O Racks are output to words A397
and A398 in the AR Area.
Errors are displayed at the I/O Control Unit or I/O Interface
Unit mounted to the Rack where the error was detected.
When an error is detected at a Power Supply Unit, it can be read at the display of
the I/O Control Unit or I/O Interface Unit.
CV500-IC101/IC201/IC301
I/O Control Unit
CV500-II101/II201
I/O Interface Unit
Normal Display
Left
Right
Display
Mode 4
Error Display (Left Unit)
Display
Error Display (Right Unit)
108
Section
Replacing a Power Supply Unit
When an error is detected at a Power Supply Unit on a CPU Rack, Expansion
CPU Rack, or Expansion I/O Rack, the content of the error can be read in words
A397 and A398, as shown in the following table.
Power Supply Error
Output
Word
A397
A398
5-5
Bits
Contents
00
The START INPUT for the right Power Supply Unit on the CPU Rack is OFF.
01
The START INPUT for the left Power Supply Unit on the CPU Rack is OFF.
02 to 15
Not used. (Reserved for system.)
00
01
02
03
Error at right Power Supply Unit on CPU Rack (Rack #0).
Error at left Power Supply Unit on CPU Rack (Rack #0).
Error at right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #1).
Error at left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #1).
04
Error at right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #2).
05
Error at left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #2).
06
Error at right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #3).
07
Error at left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #3).
08
Error at right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #4).
09
Error at left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #4).
10
Error at right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #5).
11
Error at left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #5).
12
Error at right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #6).
13
Error at left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #6).
14
Error at right Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #7).
15
Error at left Power Supply Unit on Expansion Rack (Rack #7).
0: START INPUT is
ON.
1: START INPUT is
OFF.
0: No error.
1 E
1:
Error d
detected.
d
Note Errors that occur at Slave Racks are not output to the AR Area.
Replacement Procedure
1, 2, 3...
If a Power Supply Unit error is detected by means of the I/O Control Unit or I/O
Interface Unit, or the AR Area, use the following procedure to replace the Unit.
1. When the error is detected, first check whether the START INPUT terminals
are ON for both the right and left Power Supply Units. This can be done by
monitoring bits A39700 and A39701. If either of the START INPUT terminals
is OFF, it will be detected as a Power Supply Unit error.
2. Disconnect the wiring of the defective Power Supply Unit.
• Be careful to first turn OFF the power supply. Touching the wiring while the
power supply is ON may result in electrical shock.
• If the output terminal block wiring is being used with an external sequence
circuit during operation, be sure to short-circuit the wiring so that removing
the Unit will have no adverse effect.
109
Section
Replacing a Power Supply Unit
5-5
! WARNING Do not touch the terminal block while the power is ON. Doing so may result in
electrical shock.
CVM1D-PA208
CVM1D-PA212
Terminal block
L1
100 to 240
VAC
Power supply terminals
L2/N
Functional grounding terminal (LR)
Class-3 ground terminal (GR)
NC
NC
START
INPUT
START INPUT
PC
RUN
OUTPUT
PC RUN OUTPUT
3. Remove the Power Supply Unit.
4. Mount a new Power Supply Unit. Use the same model for both the right and
left Units.
5. Connect the wiring.
110
SECTION 6
Troubleshooting
This section describes the self-diagnostic functions of the PC and provides troubleshooting techniques and error corrections.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
Troubleshooting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Messages and Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Processing and Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
Section
Troubleshooting Procedure
6-1
6-1
Troubleshooting Procedure
When an error occurs, use the following procedure to do a systematic check to
determine the cause of the error as quickly as possible and correct it.
Determine the nature of
the error.
When an error occurs, first carefully determine
the nature of the error.
S Check contents of CPU, Duplex Unit displays.
S Check I/O status and power supply.
Assess the error from the
LED indicator status.
Cause of error
clear?
Check the LED indicators at each Unit for the
cause of the error. Refer to 6-2 Error Indicators.
Correct the error.
YES
NO
Check the error code.
Cause of error
clear?
Check the error code displayed by the I/O
Interface Unit to determine the cause of the error.
Refer to 6-3 Error Messages and Alarm Outputs.
Correct the error.
YES
NO
Check the error message displayed by the
Programming Console to determine the cause of the
error. Refer to 6-3 Error Messages and Alarm Outputs.
Check the error message.
Cause of error
clear?
Correct the error.
YES
NO
Check the contents of the
error output words and bits.
Cause of error
clear?
Correct the error.
YES
NO
Check if there is a mistake
in the program or data.
Cause of error
clear?
Use the Programming Console or the SSS to
check the error output word and bit data. Refer
to 6-3 Error Messages and Alarm Outputs.
Check whether there is any mistake in the
program structure, the use of instructions, the
data contents, and so on.
Correct the error.
YES
NO
Check external environment,
wiring, settings, etc.
Cause of error
clear?
NO
Contact the nearest
OMRON representative.
112
Check whether there is disconnected cable, or
any mistake in switch settings, and so on.
Correct the error.
YES
Section
Error Indicators
6-2
6-2
Error Indicators
Simplex mode
Duplex mode
CPU Unit
Duplex
p
U i
Unit
Fatal errors
Operation change
CPU error CPU error
WDT
MEM ERR
operation
Non-fatal errors
Outputs
p
turned
d
OFF
POWER
RUN
ERROR
Lit
Not lit
Lit/Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Fatal errors
I/O bus
Duplication
error,
bus error,
CPU bus
duplicated
error, etc. verification
(Note 1.)
error at
powerup
Lit
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
WDT
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
---
ALARM
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
---
OUT INH
---
---
---
---
---
---
Lit
COMM
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
DPL RUN
DPL BUS
ERR
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
Not lit
-----
VERIFY
ERR
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
Not lit
---
ACTIVE
Lit at normal Unit.
Lit at normal Unit.
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
---
RUN
Lit at normal Unit.
Lit at normal Unit.
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
Lit
---
WAIT
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit (ACT)
Not lit
Not lit
---
PROGRAM
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Lit (STB)
Not lit
Not lit
---
CPU ERR
Lit
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
---
MEM.
ERR
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
Not lit
---
Note
Non-fatal errors
Duplication
I/O
bus error, verification
duplicated error, CPU
verification
Bus Unit
error
error, etc.
(Note 2.)
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
Lit
--Not lit
Not lit
---
1. Duplicated number, I/O points over, I/O setting error, program error, cycle
time over, SFC stop error, system failure (FALS)
2. System failure (FALS), JMP error, indirect DM BCD error, SYSMAC BUS/2
error, SYSMAC BUS error, battery failure, CPU Bus Unit setting error, duplicated power supply error
3. ---: Lit or Not lit
113
Section
Error Messages and Alarm Outputs
6-3
Error Messages and Alarm Outputs
Status
SPL
DPL
Startup
errors
Startup
errors
Running errors
114
6-3
Error
Programming De
Device error
message
Auxiliary Area data
Error
flags
Error
code
Cause
Corrective action
Error data
Waiting for
START
INPUT
CPU
WAITING
A30600
---
A397
START INPUT of
CPU Rack Power
Supply Unit is
OFF.
Connect a short-circuit so
that the START INPUT for
the Power Supply Unit on
the CPU Rack will enter.
No
SYSMAC
BUS
terminator
CPU
WAITING
A30602
---
---
Terminator is not
set.
Turn on the power to the
Remote I/O Slave Unit.
Specify the Unit connected
last as the terminator or
wait until CPU Bus Units
complete initialization.
CPU Bus
Unit
initialization
CPU
WAITING
A30603
---
---
Terminator of
SYSMAC BUS/2
is missing, or
CPU Bus Unit is
still initializing.
Turn on the power to the
Remote I/O Slave Unit.
Specify the Unit connected
last as the terminator.
I/O verify
error (PC
Setup)
CPU
WAITING
A30601
A40209
00E7
---
I/O Unit has been
removed.
Verify the I/O table.
Correct the table if
necessary by create a new
one.
Duplication
bus error
(power ON)
CPU
WAITING
A30604
---
---
An error was
detected in the
redundant
system’s
synchronous
transfer bus.
Turn the power OFF and
then ON again.
Duplication
verification
error
(power ON)
CPU
WAITING
The ACT/STB
memory contents
(user program,
Expansion DM)
contents do not
match the
Expansion DM
size.
Check/correct the
program. Correctly mount
the EM Unit.
A30605
---
---
If the error is not corrected,
replace the Duplex Unit or
the Backplane.
Section
Error Messages and Alarm Outputs
Status
SPL
Fatal
errors
Error
DPL
Operation
change
Fatal
errors
CPU error
(WDT)
Programming Device error
message
WDT ERR
Auxiliary Area data
Error
flags
---
Error
code
80FF
Cause
6-3
Corrective action
Error data
---
A watchdog timer
error was
detected by the
CPU’s
self-diagnostic
function (WDT).
Turn the power OFF and
then ON again.
If the error is not corrected,
replace the CPU Unit.
CPU error
(Memory
error)
MEMORY
ERR
A40115
80F1
A403
A memory parity
error was
detected by the
CPU’s
self-diagnostic
function.
Check/correct the
program. Correctly mount
the Memory Card and EM
Unit.
I/O bus
error
I/O BUS
ERR
A40114
80C0
to
80C7
80CE,
80CF
A404
Erroneous data
transferred
between CPU
and I/O Units
Check the cables between
the Racks. Perform the
error clear operation after
corrective action has been
taken.
Duplicated
number
NO DUPL
ERR
A40113
80E9
A409
A410
Rack numbers
and CPU Bus
Unit unit numbers
or I/O words are
assigned in
duplicate.
Set the Rack No. and Unit
No. again. Then turn the
power OFF and ON again.
Perform the error clear
operation after corrective
action has been taken.
CPU bus
error
CPU BUS
ERR
A40112
8100 to
8115
A405
Error in data
transfer between
CPU and CPU
Bus Unit or
watchdog timer
error in CPU Bus
Unit.
Check the cables between
the CPU Rack and
Expansion CPU Rack.
Perform the error clear
operation after corrective
actions have been taken.
I/O points
over
I/O OVER
A40111
80E1
A407
A408
A478
Too many I/O
points or too
many Units are
registered in the
I/O table.
Read the I/O table to
check the number of words
allocated. Correct the table
if necessary by creating a
new one.
I/O setting
error
I/O SET
ERR
A40110
80E0
---
Input/Output
designation is
wrong for I/O
Unit.
Verify the I/O table.
Correct the table if
necessary.
Program
error
NO END
INSTR
PROGRAM
OVER
A40109
80F0
---
END(001) is
missing, or the
capacity of the
user memory is
exceeded.
Correct the program.
Perform the error clear
operation after corrective
actions have been taken.
Cycle time
over
SCAN
TIME
OVER
A40108
809F
A462/463
(Maximum
Cycle Time)
A464/465 (Minimum Cycle
Time)
Cycle time
monitor
time is exceeded.
Check the program or set
time for monitoring the
cycle.
System
failure
(FALS)
SYSTEM
FAL
A40106
C101
to
C2FF
---
FALS was
executed in
program.
Check/correct the
program.
115
Section
Error Messages and Alarm Outputs
Status
Duplication
bus error
Programming Device error
message
DPL BUS
ERR
---
Duplication
verification
error.
Nonfatal
errors
SPL
DPL
Nonfatal
errors
Nonfatal
errors
116
Error
Auxiliary Area data
Error
flags
Error
code
A40200
000E
DPL
VERIFY
ERR
A40201
0011
System
error
(FAL)
SYSTEM
ERR FAL
A40215
4101 to
42FF
(*)
JMP error
JMP ERR
A40213
Indirect DM
BCD error
INDIRECT
DM BCD
ERR
I/O
verification
error
Cause
6-3
Corrective action
Error data
A396
An error was
detected in the
redundant
system’s
synchronous
transfer bus.
Check and correct the
program.
The ACT/STB
memory contents
(user program,
Expansion DM)
contents do not
match the
Expansion DM
size.
Check and correct the
program. Correctly mount
the EM Unit.
A430 to A461
(FAL No.)
Program has
executed FAL
Check the program.
00F9
---
Destination of
JMP/CJP/CJPN
is missing.
Check and correct the
program.
A40212
00F8
---
Data for indirectly
addressed DM is
not BCD.
I/O VERIFY
ERR
A40209
00E7
---
I/O table contains
a different
number of I/O
points than is
actually mounted.
Verify the I/O table. After
the corrective actions have
been taken, create a new
I/O table.
CPU Bus
Unit error
CPU
SPECIAL
UNIT ERR
A40207
0200 to
0215
0231
(**)
A422 (CPU Bus
Unit Error Unit
Number)
A42315 (CPU
Bus Link Error
Flag)
Parity error
occurs during
data transfer
between CPU
and CPU Bus
Unit.
Check the Unit.
SYSMAC
BUS/2 error
SYSMAC
BUS/2 ERR
A40206
00B0 to
00B3
(***)
A424
(SYSMAC
BUS/2 Error
Master
Number)
A480 to A499
(SYSMAC
BUS/2 Error
Unit Number)
Error occurs
between Master
and Slave in
SYSMAC BUS/2.
Check transmission lines
for SYSMAC BUS/2.
Check to see if SYSMAC
BUS/2 Slave is normal.
SYSMAC
BUS error
SYSMAC
BUS ERR
A40205
00A0 to
00A7
(****)
A425
(SYSMAC BUS
Error Master
Number)
A470 to A477
(SYSMAC BUS
Error Codes)
Error occurs
between Master
and Slave in
SYSMAC BUS.
Check transmission lines
for SYSMAC BUS. Check
to see if SYSMAC BUS
Slave is normal.
Battery
failure
BATTERY
ERR
A40204
00F7
A42615 (PC
Battery Low
Flag)
A42614
(Memory Card
Battery Low
Flag)
Battery of CPU or
Memory Card is
not connected or
battery voltage is
low.
Replace the battery of the
CPU or Memory Card.
Check the connections of
the CPU battery.
CPU Bus
Unit setting
error
CPU
SPECIAL
UNIT
SETTING
ERR
A40203
0400 to
0415
(**)
A427
Number assigned
to CPU Bus Unit
does not agree
with registered
unit number.
Check the Unit.
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
Status
SPL
---
Programming Device error
message
Error
DPL
Nonfatal
errors
Duplication
power
supply error
POWER
ERR
Auxiliary Area data
Error
flags
A40214
Error
code
0001
6-4
Cause
Corrective action
Power Supply
Unit failure. A
voltage drop has
been detected for
the output voltage
at one of the
power supplies
(right or left).
Check the defective Power
Supply Unit by means of
the I/O Interface Unit
display, and so on, and
replace it with a new Unit.
Error data
A398
Displayed
at IOC/IOIF.
PSE-: Left
PS-E: Right
Replace the Power Supply
Unit with the same model
as the other one being
used.
Note * 101 through 2FF indicate FAL Nos.
** 00 through 15 indicate the Unit Nos. of the CPU Bus Units. 31 indicates a CPU
bus link error.
*** 0 through 3 indicate the RM addresses of SYSMAC BUS/2.
**** 0 through 7 indicate the RM addresses of SYSMAC BUS.
6-4
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
Main Flowchart
When an unknown error arises, the following troubleshooting flowchart can be
used to help locate the problem.
Main flowchart
NO
POWER indicator lit?
See Power Check Flowchart
YES
NO
RUN indicator lit?
See Fault Check Flowchart
YES
YES
ALARM indicator
lit?
See Error Check Flowchart
NO
I/O sequence
correct?
NO
See I/O Check Flowchart
YES
NO
Environment normal?
See Environment Check Flowchart
YES
Replace Unit
Note Before replacing a Unit, be sure to turn off the power to the PC. The same applies
when replacing the EM Unit, batteries, wiring, and cables.
117
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
6-4
Power Check Flowchart
POWER indicator not lit
NO
Power supplied?
Supply power
YES
NO
Voltage in rated
range?
POWER
indicator lit?
YES
NO
Adjust voltage
YES
NO
All
terminals tightened
and lead wires
intact?
NO
POWER
indicator lit?
YES
Tighten screws
or replace lead wires
YES
NO
POWER
indicator lit?
YES
END
Replace Power Supply Unit
Unit
CVM1D-PA212
CVM1D PA208
CVM1D-PA208
I/O Check Flowchart
Supply voltage
100 to 120 VAC
200 to 240 VAC
Operating voltage range
85 to 132 VAC
170 to 264 VAC
It is assumed that the ladder diagram shown below is programmed and that
SOL1 malfunctions.
(LS1)
000002
(LS2)
000003
000500
SOL1
000500
118
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
6-4
Given such a malfunction, the flowchart on the following page may be used to
help locate the problem.
Start
Indicator of
000500 normal?
NO
YES
Check terminal
voltage of 000500
with tester
Correct wiring
Replace terminal
block connector
NO
ABNORMAL
Decision
YES
Faulty
terminal block
connector
contact?
Output
wiring correct?
NORMAL
Replace fuse
Monitor ON/OFF
status of 000500
with Programming
Device
YES
Is the
blown fuse
indicator lit?
NO
NO
YES
NORMAL
Check terminal
voltage of 000500
with tester
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
Decision
(Only
unit with
fuse)
ABNORMAL
Decision
(Unit without fuse)
Check output
device SOL1
Replace Output
Unit
Indicators of
inputs (000002,
000003) normal?
NO
Check terminal
voltages of 000002
and 000003 with
tester
YES
Check terminal
voltages of 000002
and 000003 with
tester
Decision
YES
NORMAL
Terminal
screws loose?
ABNORMAL
Decision
NO
ABNORMAL
NORMAL
Remove external
wiring and mount
Dummy Input Unit
to check
YES
Faulty
terminal block
connector
contact?
Input
wiring correct?
NO
Correctly wire
ABNORMAL
Decision
NO
YES
Tighten
Replace terminal
block connector
NORMAL
Replace Input
Unit
Check input devices LS1 and LS2
Return to
START
Replace Input
Unit
119
Section
Troubleshooting Flowcharts
Environment Check Flowchart
Environment check
Temperature
55°C or less?
Higher than 55°C
Install fan or air conditioner
Less than 55°C
Temperature
0°C or higher?
Less than 0°C
Install heater
Higher than 0°C
Humidity in
range of 10% to
90%?
NO
Install air conditioner
YES
Noise measures?
Not provided
Provide surge suppression
to counter noise source.
Isolate the Backplane from
the control panel using a
Spacer before mounting.
Provided
Atmosphere
OK?
OK?
END
120
NO
Install PC in a control
panel
6-4
Section
Error Processing and Correction
6-5
6-5
Error Processing and Correction
CPU Rack/Expansion CPU Rack/Expansion I/O Rack
Symptom
Cause
Remedy
POWER indicator is not lit.
PCB short-circuited or damaged by heat.
Replace Power Supply Unit or Backplane.
RUN indicator is not lit.
(1) START INPUT terminals are OFF.
Short-circuit START INPUT terminals.
(2) Error in program.
Correct program
(3) Power line is faulty.
Replace Power Supply Unit.
Internal circuitry of
Power Supply Unit is faulty.
Replace Power Supply Unit.
(1) CPU cable is faulty.
(2) CPU bus is faulty.
(3) Expansion CPU Rack is faulty.
I/O bus faulty.
Replace CPU cable.
Replace Backplane.
Replace I/O Control or I/O Interface Unit.
Replace Backplane.
(1) I/O cable is faulty.
(2) I/O bus is faulty.
(3) Expansion I/O Rack is faulty.
Replace I/O cable.
Replace Backplane.
Replace I/O Control or I/O Interface Unit.
I/O bit turns ON
I/O bus is faulty.
Replace Backplane.
All bits for one Unit do not
turn ON.
I/O bus is faulty.
Replace Backplane.
DPL BUS ERR indicator is
lit.
The redundant system is faulty.
Replace Duplex Unit or Backplane.
VERIFY ERR indicator is lit.
The redundant system or the CPU bus is
faulty.
Replace Duplex Unit or Backplane.
PC RUN OUTPUT does not
turn ON.
RUN indicator lit.
Link Unit or CPU Bus Unit
d
does
not operate or malfunclf
tions
tions.
Bit does not operate.
Error occurs in units of 8
i
points.
121
Section
Error Processing and Correction
6-5
Input Units
Symptom
Not all inputs turn ON or indi
dicators
are not lit.
li
Cause
Remedy
(1) Power is not supplied to Input Unit.
(2) Supply voltage is low.
(3) Terminal block mounting screws are
loose.
Supply power
Adjust supply voltage to within rated range.
Tighten screws.
(4) Faulty contact of terminal block connector.
Replace terminal block connector.
Not all inputs turn ON (indicator lit).
Input circuit is faulty.
Replace Unit.
Not all inputs turn OFF.
Specific bit does not turn
ON
ON.
Input circuit is faulty.
Replace Unit.
(1) Input device is faulty.
(2) Input wiring disconnected.
(3) Terminal block screws are loose.
Replace input devices.
Check input wiring
Tighten screws
(4) Faulty terminal block connector contact.
Replace terminal block connector.
(5) Too short ON time of external input.
Adjust input device
(6) Faulty input circuit
Replace Unit.
(7) Input bit number is used for output instruction.
Correct program.
Specific bit does not turn
OFF
OFF.
(1) Input circuit is faulty.
(2) Input bit number is used for output instruction.
Replace Unit.
Correct program.
Input irregularly turns ON/
OFF.
(1) External input voltage is low.
Adjust external input voltage to within rated
range.
(2) Malfunction due to noise.
Protective measures against noise, such
as:
(1) Install surge suppressor.
(2) Install insulation transformer.
(3) Install shielded cable.
(4) Isolate the Backplane from the control
panel before mounting.
(3) Terminal block screws are loose.
Tighten screws
(4) Faulty terminal block connector contact.
Replace terminal block connector.
(1) Common terminal screws are loose.
(2) Faulty terminal block connector contact.
Tighten screws
Replace terminal block connector.
(3) Faulty data bus
Replace Unit.
(4) Faulty CPU
Replace CPU.
Faulty indicator
Replace Unit.
Error occurs in units of 8
points.
i
Input indicator is not lit in
normal operation.
122
Appendix A
Standard Models
CPU Racks
Name
Specifications
Model
CPU Backplane
5 slots
CVM1D-BC051
CPU Unit
Two are required in a duplex system.
CVM1D-CPU21
Duplex Unit
Must also be used in simplex system.
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC
8A
(In a system with dual power
ower
supplies, use two Power Supply
12 A
Units of the same model.)
CVM1D-DPL01
To connect Expansion CPU Racks*
CV500-IC101
To connect Expansion I/O Racks*
CV500-IC201
Power Supply Unit
I/O Control Unit
Memory Card
CVM1D-PA212
To connect C500 Expansion I/O Racks
CV500-IC301
RAM
64K bytes
HMC-ES641
128K bytes
HMC-ES151
256K bytes
HMC-ES251
512K bytes
HMC-ES551
64K bytes
HMC-EE641
128K bytes
HMC-EE151
512 bytes
HMC-EP551
1M bytes
HMC-EP161
EEPROM
EPROM
(Requires CV500-MCW01
Memory Card.)
EM Unit ((Expansion DM
M
Memory
U
Unit)
i)
CVM1D-PA208
64K bytes
128K bytes
256K bytes
CV1000-DM641
CV1000-DM151
CV1000-DM251
Note *Two CV500-TER01 Terminating Resistance Units are provided with each CV500-IC101/IC201 I/O Control
Unit.
123
Appendix A
Standard Models
Expansion CPU Racks
Name
Expansion CPU Backplane
Power Supply Unit
Specifications
10 slots
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC
(In a system with dual power supplies
supplies, use two
Power Supply Units of the same model.)
Model
CVM1D-BI101
8A
CVM1D-PA208
12 A
CVM1D-PA212
I/O Interface Unit
For Expansion CPU Rack
CV500-II101
CPU Bus Cable
Length: 30 cm
CV500-CN311
Length: 60 cm
CV500-CN611
Length: 30 cm
CV500-CN312
Length: 60 cm
CV500-CN612
Mount to an I/O Expansion Unit to be used as a terminator. Two
Terminating Resistance Units are provided the CV500-IC101/201 I/O
Control Unit.
CV500-TER01
I/O Cable
Terminating Resistance Unit
Expansion I/O Backplanes
Name
Expansion I/O Backplane
Power Supply Unit
Specifications
10 slots
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC
(In a system with dual power supplies
supplies, use two
Power Supply Units of the same model.)
Model
CVM1D-BI102
8A
CVM1D-PA208
12 A
CVM1D-PA212
I/O Interface Unit
For Expansion I/O Rack
CV500-II201
I/O Cable
Length: 30 cm
CV500-CN312
Length: 60 cm
CV500-CN612
Length: 1 m
CV500-CN122
Length: 2 m
CV500-CN222
Length: 3 m
CV500-CN322
Length: 5 m
CV500-CN522
Length: 10 m
CV500-CN132
Length: 20 m
CV500-CN232
Length: 30 m
CV500-CN332
Length: 40 m
CV500-CN432
Length: 50 m
CV500-CN532
Mount to an I/O Expansion Unit to be used as a terminator. Two
Terminating Resistance Units are provided the CV500-IC101/201 I/O
Control Unit.
CV500-TER01
Terminating Resistance Unit
124
Appendix A
Standard Models
Input Units
Name
Input Units
DC
AC
AC/DC
TTL
Specifications
16 mA, 5 to 12 VDC; ON delay: 1.5 16 pts 8 pts/common; 2 circuits
ms, OFF delay: 1.5 ms
Model
3G2A5-ID112
10 mA, 12 to 24 VDC; ON delay:
1.5 ms, OFF delay: 1.5 ms
16 pts
8 pts/common; 2 circuits
3G2A5-ID213
10 mA, 12 to 24 VDC; ON delay:
1.5 ms, OFF delay: 1.5 ms
32 pts
8 pts/common; 4 circuits
3G2A5-ID215
10 mA, 12 to 24 VDC; ON delay:
1.5 ms, OFF delay: 1.5 ms
32 pts
8 pts/common; 4 circuits
3G2A5-ID218
10 mA, 12 to 24 VDC; connector
32 pts
8 pts/common; 4 circuits
C500-ID218CN
7 mA, 12 VDC; static; ON delay:
1.5 ms, OFF delay: 1.5 ms
64 pts
8 pts/common; 8 circuits
C500-ID114
10 mA, 24 VDC; dynamic scan
64 pts
---
3G2A5-ID212
7 mA, 24 VDC; ON delay: 1.5 ms,
OFF delay: 1.5 ms
64 pts
8 pts/common; 8 circuits
3G2A5-ID219
10 mA, 100 to 120 VAC; ON delay:
35 ms, OFF delay: 55 ms
16 pts
8 pts/common; 2 circuits
3G2A5-IA121
10 mA, 200 to 240 VAC; ON delay:
35 ms, OFF delay: 55 ms
16 pts
8 pts/common; 2 circuits
3G2A5-IA222
10 mA, 100 to 120 VAC; ON delay:
35 ms, OFF delay: 55 ms
32 pts
8 pts/common; 4 circuits
3G2A5-IA122
10 mA, 200 to 240 VAC; ON delay:
35 ms, OFF delay: 55 ms
32 pts
8 pts/common; 4 circuits
C500-IA223
10 mA, 12 to 24 VAC/DC; ON
delay: 15 ms, OFF delay: 15 ms
16 pts
8 pts/common; 2 circuits
3G2A5-IM211
10 mA, 12 to 24 VAC/DC; ON
delay: 15 ms, OFF delay: 15 ms
32 pts
8 pts/common; 4 circuits
3G2A5-IM212
3.5 mA, 5 VDC; connector
32 pts
8 pts/common; 4 circuits
C500-ID501CN
125
Appendix A
Standard Models
Output Units
Name
Output Units
Contact
Transistor
Triac
TTL
Specifications
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC; with relay
16 pts
sockets; 8 commons
8 pts/common; 2 circuits
Model
3G2A5-OC221
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC; with relay
sockets; all outputs independent
16 pts
Independent commons
3G2A5-OC223
2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC; with relay
sockets
32 pts
8 pts/common; 4 circuits
3G2A5-OC224
1 A, 12 to 24 VDC; no output when 16 pts
external power supply is OFF
8 pts/common; 2 circuits
C500-OD217
2.1 A, 12 to 24 VDC
16 pts
8 pts/common; 2 circuits
C500-OD219
1 A, 12 to 48 VDC
16 pts
16 pts/common; 1 circuit
3G2A5-OD411
50 mA, 24 VDC; all outputs independent
16 pts
Independent commons
3G2A5-OD215
0.3 A, 12 to 24 VDC
32 pts
16 pts/common; 2 circuits
C500-OD218
0.3 A, 12 to 48 VDC
32 pts
16 pts/common; 2 circuits
C500-OD414
0.3 A, 12 to 48 VDC; negative
common; terminal block
32 pts
32 pts/common; 1 circuit
3G2A5-OD412
0.3 A, 12 to 24 VDC; positive common
32 pts
16 pts/common; 2 circuits
3G2A5-OD212
0.3 A, 12 to 48 VDC; negative
common; connector
32 pts
16 pts/common; 2 circuits
C500-OD415CN
0.1 A, 24 VDC; dynamic scan
64 pts
---
3G2A5-OD211
0.1 A, 24 VDC; static connector
64 pts
8 pts/common; 8 circuits
3G2A5-OD213
1 A, 100 to 240 VAC
32 pts
8 pts/common; 4 circuits
C500-OA225
1.2 A, 100 to 240 VAC
16 pts
8 pts/common; 2 circuits
C500-OA226
35 mA, 5 VDC; connector
32 pts
8 pts/common; 4 circuits
C500-OD501CN
DC Input/Transistor Output 12 to 24-VDC inputs: 10 mA; 12 to
Unit
24-VDC outputs: 0.3 connector
16 pts
each
---
C500-MD211CN
Dummy I/O Unit
Input or output
16, 32, --or 64
points
I/O Power Supply Unit
Input: 100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC Output:
2A, 24 VDC
126
---
3G2A5-DUM01
CV500-IPS01
Appendix A
Standard Models
Special I/O Units
Name
Analog Input Unit
Analog Output Unit
Temperature Sensor Unit
Specifications
Model
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 V; 2 inputs
2 pts
3G2A5-AD001
0 to 10 V; 2 inputs
2 pts
3G2A5-AD002
0 to 5 V; 2 inputs
2 pts
3G2A5-AD003
–10 to 10 V; 2 inputs
2 pts
3G2A5-AD004
–5 to 5 V; 2 inputs
2 pts
3G2A5-AD005
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 V; 4 inputs
4 pts
3G2A5-AD006
0 to 10 V; 4 inputs
4 pts
3G2A5-AD007
0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA (selectable); 8 inputs
8 pts
C500-AD101
0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V –5 to 5 V, –10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA,
–20 to 20 mA; 16 inputs
16 pts
C500-AD501
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 V; 2 outputs
2 pts
3G2A5-DA001
0 to 10 V; 2 outputs
2 pts
3G2A5-DA002
0 to 5 V; 2 outputs
2 pts
3G2A5-DA003
–10 to 10 V; 2 outputs
2 pts
3G2A5-DA004
–5 to 5 V; 2 outputs
2 pts
3G2A5-DA005
0 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 V/0 to 10 V (selectable); 4 outputs
4 pts
C500-DA101
–10 to 10 V, 4 outputs
4 pts
C500-DA103
Voltage inputs, supports 8 types of thermocouples
8 pts
C500-TS501
Platinum resistance thermometer
High-speed Counter Unit
Position Control Unit
C500-TS502
6-digit BCD; 50 kcps; one counted input; 1 pair of SV
1 pt
3G2A5-CT001
6-digit BCD; 50 kcps; one counted input; 8 pair of SV
1 pt
3G2A5-CT012
50 kcps; 7 operating modes
2 pts
C500-CT021
6-digit BCD; 20 kcps; four counted inputs; 6 modes
4 pts
C500-CT041
For stepping motor; one axis
3G2A5-NC111-EV1
For pulse motors; two axes
C500-NC222-E
1-axis control
C500-NC113
2-axis control
C500-NC211
Encoder Adapter
3G2A5-AE001
Teaching Box
For 1 axis
3G2A5-TU001-E
For 2 axes
Connecting
g Cable: To connect C500-TU002-E Teachi Box
ing
B to
t C500-NC222-E.
C500 NC222 E
C500-TU002-E
2m
C200H-CN222
4m
C200H-CN422
Connecting Cable: To connect C500-TU002-E Teaching Box to
3G2A5-NC103-E/NC111-EV1 Position Control Unit.
C500-CN422
Cam Positioner Unit
External outputs: 8 pts; Words output to PC: 2 (16 pts.)
C500-CP131
ASCII Unit
RAM and EEPROM
C500-ASC04
Ladder Program I/O Unit
Has 40 instructions (same as a C20P.) Input and output points
(16 each.)
C500-LDP01-V1
ID Sensor Unit
Electromagnetic
type
g
y
Microwave type
y
General-purpose
C500--V1
Long-distance
C500-IDS02
General-purpose
C500-IDS21
Long-distance
C500-IDS22
For the C500-IDS02
C500-IDA02
For the C500-IDS22
C500-IDA22
127
Appendix A
Standard Models
CPU Bus Units
The CV-series SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC BUS/2, and SYSMAC NET Link Units are also classified as CPU Bus
Units. CPU Bus Units must be mounted to the proper slots on CPU or Expansion CPU Racks.
Name
Temperature Controller Data Link
Unit
Specifications
Connects up to 64 temperature control devices via 2
ports.
Model
CV500-TDL21
BASIC Unit
Must be mounted
to CPU or CPU
Expansion Rack
Personal Computer Unit
RS-232C x 2
RS 422 x 1
RS-422
RAM
CV500-BSC11
EEPROM +
RAM
CV500-BSC21
RS-232C x 2
Centronics x 1
RAM
CV500-BSC31
EEPROM +
RAM
CV500-BSC41
RS-232C x 2
GP IB x 1
GP-IB
RAM
CV500-BSC51
EEPROM +
RAM
CV500-BSC61
Without floating-point division
With floating-point division
CV500-VP213-E
8MB main memory
CV500-VP217-E
4MB main memory
CV500-VP223-E
8MB main memory
CV500-VP227-E
RAM Disk Board
2MB memory
CV500-MR261
PC Card Interface Board
For PCMCIA 2.1 Type I and II cards
CV500-MP602
Floppy Disk Drive
One floppy disk drive
CV500-FDD01
Two floppy disk drives
CV500-FDD02
For 100 VAC
CV500-FHD01-E
For 200 VAC
CV500-FHD02-E
---
CV500-BAT08
2 axes
CV500-MC221
4 axes
CV500-MC421
Cable length: 2 m
CV500-CN224
Cable length: 4 m
CV500-CN424
Cable length: 6 m
CV500-CN624
For IBM PC/AT or compatible
CV500-ZN3AT1-E
Floppy/Hard Disk Drive
Backup Battery Set
Motion Control Unit
Teaching Box Connecting
Cables
MC Support Software
128
4MB main memory
Appendix A
Standard Models
Network Units and Remote I/O Units
The CV-series SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC BUS/2, SYSMAC NET Link Units, and Ethernet Units are classified as
CPU Bus Units.
Name
SYSMAC NET Link Unit
Specifications
General-purpose
Model
CV500-SNT31
SYSMAC LINK Unit
Optical
CV500-SLK11
Coaxial
CV500-SLK21
Power Feeder Unit
For optical SYSMAC LINK Unit
C1000H-APS01
Controller Link Unit
Wired
CVM1-CLK21
M-NET Interface Unit
Wired
CV500-MIF01
ME-NET Interface Unit
Coaxial
CV500-TLK01
Remote I/O Master Unit
Optical
CV500-RM211
Wired
CV500-RM221
Optical
CV500-RT211
Wired
CV500-RT221
Supports TCP/IP and UDP/ID
CV500-ETN01
Optical Remote I/O Master
Unit
APF/PCF
3G2A5-RM001-PEV1
Optical Remote I/O Slave Unit
APF/
W/1 optical connector
3G2A5-RT001-PEV1
PCF
W/2 optical connectors
3G2A5-RT002-PEV1
PCF
W/1 optical connector
3G2A5-RT001-EV1
W/2 optical connectors
3G2A5-RT002-EV1
SYSMAC BUS/2
Remote I/O Slave Unit
Ethernet Unit
SYSMAC BUS
SYSMAC BUS
Optical I/O Units
PCF
Wired Remote I/O Master Unit
---
Wired Remote I/O Slave Unit
---
DC Input
8 pts
No-voltage contact
AC/DC
Input
12 to 24 VAC/DC 8 pts
AC Input
100 VAC
Contact
Output
2 A, 250 VAC/ 24 8 pts
VDC
Transistor
Output
0.3 A, 12 to 48
VDC
3G2A5-RM001-EV1
C500-RM201
C500-RT201
100-VAC power supply
8 pts
8 pts
100/200-VAC
power supply
APF/PCF
3G5A2-ID001-PE
PCF
3G5A2-ID001-E
APF/PCF
3G5A2-IM211-PE
PCF
3G5A2-IM211-E
APF/PCF
3G5A2-IA121-PE
PCF
3G5A2-IA121-E
APF/PCF
3G5A2-OC221-PE
PCF
3G5A2-OC221-E
APF/PCF
3G5A2-OD411-PE
PCF
3G5A2-OD411-E
129
Appendix A
Standard Models
Miscellaneous Remote I/O System Units
Link Adapters with the suffix -P in the model number can be extended up to 200 m by using plastic-clad optical fiber
cable. Those without the suffix -P in the model number can be extended up to 800 m.
Name
Link Adapter
Specifications
RS-422, 3 pcs
Model
3G2A9-AL001
Optical (APF/PCF), 3pcs
3G2A9-AL002-PE
Optical (PCF), 3pcs
3G2A9-AL002-E
Optical (APF/PCF), RS-422, RS-232C, 1 pc each
3G2A9-AL004-PE
Optical (PCF), RS-422, RS-232C, 1 pc each
3G2A9-AL004-E
All Plastic Optical-Fiber Cable (APF)
Name
Plastic Optical Fiber Cable
Specifications
Cable only, 5 to 100 m in multiples of 5 m, or multiples of
200 or 500 m
Model
3G5A2-PF002
Optical Connector A
2 pcs (brown), for plastic optical fiber 10 m long max.
3G5A2-CO001
Optical Connector B
2 pcs (black) for plastic optical fiber 8 to 20 m long
3G5A2-CO002
Plastic Optical Fiber Cable
1 m, w/optical connector A provided at both ends
3G5A2-PF101
Plastic-Clad Optical-Fiber Cable (PCF)
Name
Optical Fiber Cable (indoor)
0.1 m, w/connector
Specifications
Ambient temperature:
1 m, w/connector
Optical Fiber Cable
(indoor/outdoor)
130
–10° to 70°C
Model
3G5A2-OF011
3G5A2-OF101
2 m, w/connector
3G5A2-OF201
3 m, w/connector
3G5A2-OF301
5 m, w/connector
3G5A2-OF501
10 m, w/connector
3G5A2-OF111
20 m, w/connector
3G5A2-OF211
30 m, w/connector
3G5A2-OF311
40 m, w/connector
3G5A2-OF411
50 m, w/connector
3G5A2-OF511
1 to 500 m (order in units of 1
m)
Ambient temperature:
–10° to 70°C
501 to 800 m (order in units of
1 m)
Ambient temperature: 0°
to 55°C (Must not be subjected to direct sunlight)
3G5A2-OF002
Appendix A
Standard Models
Hard-plastic-clad Quartz Fiber Cable: H-PCF
Up to 800 m of H-PCF cable can be used between Units in the following systems: SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC LINK,
and SYSMAC BUS/2. In the SYSMAC BUS system, up to 100 m of H-PCF cable can be used between Units
whose model number suffix contains a P and up to 200 m between other Units whose model number does not
contain a P.
You can used connector-equipped cables or assemble cables yourself. The following are required to assemble
H-PCF cable: the cable itself, Optical Connectors, Cable Assembly Tool, Cable Cutter Optical Power Tester, Head
Unit, and Master Fiber. The user must assemble and test the optical connectors. Refer to the H-PCF Installation
Manual for details.
H-PCF cables can be used at an ambient temperature of between –20° and 70°C.
H-PCF Optical Fiber Cords and Cables
Cable type
Two optical conductors with
f d
feeder
Cable color
Black
Orange
Without feeder
Black
Orange
Two-core optical cord
Black
Cable length
10 meters
50 meters
100 meters
500 meters
1,000 meters
10 meters
50 meters
100 meters
500 meters
1,000 meters
10 m
50 m
100 m
500 m
10 m
50 m
100 m
500 m
10 m
50 m
100 m
500 m
1,000 m
Model
S3200-HCLB101
S3200-HCLB501
S3200-HCLB102
S3200-HCLB502
S3200-HCLB103
S3200-HCLO101
S3200-HCLO501
S3200-HCLO102
S3200-HCLO502
S3200-HCLO103
S3200-HCCB101
S3200-HCCB501
S3200-HCCB102
S3200-HCCB502
S3200-HCCO101
S3200-HCCO501
S3200-HCCO102
S3200-HCCO502
S3200-HBCB101
S3200-HBCB501
S3200-HBCB102
S3200-HBCB502
S3200-HBCB103
131
Appendix A
Standard Models
H-PCF Optical Fiber Cords and Cables with Connectors
The following diagram illustrates the model number for cables with connectors. tension members and power lines
are provided in the cable. Half-lock connectors use the S3200-COCF2511 and are compatible with C200H SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link Unit connectors. Full-lock connectors use the S3200-COCF2011 and are compatible with CV-series SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET and C1000H SYSMAC LINK Link Unit connectors. Fulllock connectors cannot be used with C200H connectors.
The above connectors cannot be used with C500 SYSMAC NET Link Unit connectors, cable relays, or NSB. Refer
to the SYSMAC NET Link System Manual for appropriate connectors for these applications.
S3200-CNjjj-jj-jj
Cable Length
201
2m
501
5m
102
10 m
152
15 m
202
20 m
Blank
Over 20 m*
Connector Type
20-20
Full-lock connecter on each end
20-25
One full-lock and one half-lock connector
25-25
Full lock connector on each end
*Specify lengths over 20 m separately when ordering.
Optical Connectors
Name
SYSMAC NET:
CV500-SNT31
SYSMAC LINK:
CV500-SLK11, C1000H-SLK11
Model
S3200-COCF2011
SYSMAC BUS/2: CV500-RM211/RT211
SYSMAC NET:
C200H-SNT31
SYSMAC LINK:
C200H-SLK11
SYSMAC NET:
C500-SNT31-V4
S3200-LSU03-01E/NSB11-E
S3200-NSUA1-00E/NSUG4-00E
FIT10-IF401
3G2A5-RM001-(P)EV1
3G2A5-RT001/RT002-(P)EV1
3G2A9-ALjj-(P)E
SYSMAC BUS:
S3200-COCF2511
S3200-COCH62M
S3200-COCH82
SYSMAC NET Relay (M) Connector
S3200-COCF62M
SYSMAC NET Relay (F) Connector
S3200-COCF62F
Cable Assembly Tool and Cutter
Name
Cable Assembly Tool
Model
S3200-CAK1062
Optical Power Tester
Name
Model
SYSMAC NET:
CV500-SNT31
S3200-CAT2000
SYSMAC LINK:
CV500-SLK11
S3200-CAT2700
SYSMAC BUS/2: CV500-RM211/RT211
SYSMAC BUS:
3G2A5-RM001-(P)EV1
3G2A5-RT001/RT002-(P)EV1
S3200-CAT2820
SYSMAC NET:
S3200-LSU03-01E
FIT10-IF401
S3200-CAT3200
Note Each Optical Power Tester is provided with a replaceable Head Unit. There is no difference in type among
all Optical Power Testers except for the head unit. This means the S3200-CAT2000 Optical Power Tester,
for example, can be used as the S3200-CAT2700, S3200-CAT2820, or S3200-CAT3200 Optical Power
Tester by just replacing the Head Unit of the S3200-CAT2000 with those for the S3200-CAT2700,
S3200-CAT2820, or S3200-CAT3200.
132
Appendix A
Standard Models
Optical Power Tester Head Unit
Name
Model
SYSMAC NET:
CV500-SNT31
S3200-CAT2002
SYSMAC LINK:
CV500-SLK11
S3200-CAT2702
SYSMAC BUS/2: CV500-RM211/RT211
SYSMAC BUS:
3G2A5-RM001-(P)EV1
3G2A5-RT001/RT002-(P)EV1
S3200-CAT2822
SYSMAC NET:
S3200-LSU03-01E
FIT10-IF401
S3200-CAT3202
Programming Devices
Name
Specifications
CV Support Software Version 2 Runs on an IBM PC/AT-compatible computer
(CVSS) (See
(S note))
Model
3 1/2”
5 1/4”
3 1/2”
CV500-ZS3AT1-EV2
CV500-ZS5AT1-EV2
C500-ZL3AT1-E
SYSMAC Support Software
(SSS) (See note)
Runs on an IBM PC/AT-compatible computer
Memory Card Writer
---
CV500-MCW01-E
Programming Console
For CVM1/CV-series PCs only, cable required separately.
CVM1-PRS21-EV1
Note The CVSS does not support new instructions added for version-2 CVM1 PCs. The SSS does not support
the CV500, CV1000, or CV2000.
Optional
Name
Battery
---
Model
3G2A5-BAT08
Memory Card Battery
---
HMC-BAT01
I/O Terminal Cover
For 38-pin block, special type
3G2A5-COV11
For 38-pin block, standard
C500-COV12
For 20-pin block, standard
C500-COV13
Protector for I/O bus connector
3G2A5-COV01
Protector for CPU bus connector
CV500-COV01
Protector for Expansion I/O Rack IOIF connector
CV500-COV02
Protector for CPU Rack IOC or Expansion CPU Rack IOIF
connector
CV500-COV03
Protector for Simple Expansion I/O Rack connector
CV500-COV04
Space Unit
For I/O Unit
3G2A5-SP002
Noise-preventing Spacers
Isolate the Backplanes of the CPU, Expansion 50 pieces
CPU and Expansion I/O Rack from the conCPU,
4 pieces
trol panel before mounting.
CV500-ATT04
Connector Cover (see note)
Specifications
CV500-ATT05
133
Appendix B
Specifications
Common Specifications
Item
Specifications
Vibration resistance
10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 (see note) in X, Y,
and Z directions for 80 minutes (Time coefficient; 8 minutes x coefficient factor 10 = total time
80 minutes) (according to JIS C0040)
Shock resistance
147 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions (according to JIS C0041)
Enclosure
Mounted in a panel
Ambient temperature
Humidity
Operating: 0° to 55°C
Storage: –20° to 75°C (except Memory Card and battery)
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Atmosphere
Must be free from corrosive gasses
Note
Acceleration (m/s2)
9.8
Amplitude:
0.075 mm
Frequency (Hz)
Power Supply Units
Specifications
Item
Racks
Input power
supply
y
CVM1D-PA208
CVM1D-PA212
CPU Rack, Expansion CPU Rack, Expansion I/O Rack
Rated
voltage
100 to 120 VAC/200 to 240 VAC (automatic voltage switching)
Frequency
Power consumption
50/60 Hz ±5%
85 to 132 VAC/170 to 264 VAC
150 VA max.
Inrush current
30 A max.
Output capacity
8A
Grounding
Less than 100 W
Insulation resistance
20 MW min. (at 500 VDC) between AC external terminals and
Dielectric strength
2,300 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min between AC external and
10 mA max. (See note)
Noise immunity
1,500 Vp-p, pulse width: 100 ns to 1 ms, rise time: 1 ns (via noise simulation)
Current protection
105% min.
Voltage protection
6 V min.
Start input
10 mA, 24 VDC
Operating output contact
Terminal
Size
screws
Torque
1a 250 VAC; 2A (COS φ = 1); 0.5 A (COS φ = 0.4); 24 VDC 2A
Dimensions
M3.5
0.8 N⋅m
250 x 47 x 96 mm (HxWxD)
Weight
0.9 kilograms
200 VA max.
12 A
(GR) terminals. (See note.)
(GR) terminals, leakage current:
Note Disconnect the (LG) terminal of the Power Supply Unit from the (GR) terminal when performing insulation and dielectric strength tests. If the tests are repeatedly performed with the (LG) and (GR) terminals
short-circuited, the internal components may be damaged.
135
Appendix B
Specifications
CPU Specifications
CPU
CVM1D-CPU21
Control method
Stored program
I/O control method
(See note.)
Cyclic and programmed refreshing
Programming
Ladder
Instruction length
1 to 8 words/instruction, 1 address/instruction
Ladder instructions
Execution
Basic
time
i
(µs)
( )
Special
275 (500 variations )
Program capacity
Local I/O capacity
Remote I/O SYSMAC
p
y
capacity
BUS/2
SYSMAC
BUS
0.125 to 0.375
0.500 to 8.25
62K words
2.048 pts (0000 to 0127)
2,048 pts
2,048 pts
Remote I/O bits
SYSMAC BUS/2: 12,800 (0200 to 0999);
SYSMAC BUS: 4,096 (2300 to 2555)
Work bits
1,152 (0128 to 0199)
6,400 (1900 to 2299)
Link bits
3,200: 100000 to 119915 (words 1000 to 1199)
Holding bits
4,800: 120000 to 149915 (words 1200 to 1499)
CPU Bus Unit bits
6,400: 150000 to 189915 (words 1500 to 1899)
Temporary bits
8 (TR0 to TR7)
CPU bus link bits
4,096: G00000 to G25515 (words G000 to G255)
Auxiliary bits
Timers
8,192: A00000 to A51115 (words A000 to A511)
Data memory
1,024 (T0000 to T1023)
Normal timers: 0 to 999.9 s, high-speed timers: 0 to 99.99 s
1,024 (C0000 to C1023)
(0 to 9999 counts)
24,576 words (D00000 to D24575)
Expansion DM
256K words (E00000 to E32765 x 8 banks)
Data registers
3 (DR0 to DR2)
Index registers
3 (IR0 to IR2)
File memory
Memory Cards: RAM (512K bytes), EEPROM (128K bytes), or EPROM (1M bytes)
Control input signal
START INPUT: In RUN mode, PC begins operation when input is ON and halts when it is
OFF. Input specifications: 24 VDC, 10 mA
Control output signal
PC RUN OUTPUT:
The RUN OUTPUT terminals are ON (closed) while PC is operating.
Maximum switching capacity:
250 VAC/2 A (resistive load, cosf = 1)
250 VAC/0.5 A (inductive load, cosf = 0.4)
24 VDC/2 A
Memory protection
Holding bits (internal status maintained), contents of counters and data memory, SFC
execution status (can be set)
Battery life
Service life: 5 years. The memory backup time when PC is not powered varies with the
ambient temperature.
Self-diagnostics
CPU failure (watchdog timer), I/O verify error, I/O bus error, memory failure, remote I/O error,
battery error, link error, or Special I/O Unit/CPU Bus Unit errors
Counters
Note The CVM1D does not support immediate, zero-cross, and scheduled refreshing. Although it is possible to
specify immediate refreshing with instructions, faulty operation can occur with Duplex Systems. Do not use
immediate refreshing with Duplex Systems. It can be used with Simplex Systems. (Although immediate,
zero-cross, and scheduled refreshing can be specified in the PC Setup, these settings will be ignored.)
136
Appendix B
Specifications
DC Input Units
Item
3G2A5-ID112
3G2A5-ID213
Input Voltage
5 to 12 VDC +10%/–15%
12 to 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance
560 W
2.2 kW
Input Current
16 mA typical (at 12 VDC)
10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
4.0 VDC min.
10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
1.5 VDC max.
3.0 VDC max.
ON Delay
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
OFF Delay
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
No. of Inputs
16 (8 inputs/common, 2 circuits)
16 (8 inputs/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
10 mA, 5 VDC max.
20 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
450 grams max.
450 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
COM
COM
6.8kW
IN 00
to
IN 06
IN 07
1.8kW
560 W
Internal
Circuit
COM
IN 00
to
IN 06
IN 07
2.2 kW
Internal
Circuit
COM
6.8kW
IN 08
to
IN 14
IN 15
1.8kW
IN 08
to
IN 14
IN 15
560 W
2.2 kW
Two-wire sensors cannot be connected.
Terminal
Connections
0
1
2
5 to 12 VDC
3
+
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
5 to 12 VDC
+
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
Dimensions
A-shape
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1
2
12 to 24 VDC
3
+
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
12 to 24 VDC
+
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A-shape
137
Appendix B
Specifications
DC Input Units (Continued)
Item
3G2A5-ID215
3G2A5-ID218
Input Voltage
12 to 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance
2.2 kW
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
ON Delay
15 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
OFF Delay
15 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
No. of Inputs
32 (8 inputs/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption
160 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
450 grams max.
260 mA, 5 VDC max.
Circuit Configuration
2.2 kW
IN 00
to
IN 07
I
See
below.
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
Internal
Circuit
2.2 kW
IN 00
to
IN 07
II
See
below.
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
ID215: 560 W
ID218: 750 W
Terminal Connections
A
I
12 to 24 VDC
+
12 to 24 VDC
+
+
+
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
Dimensions
138
B-shape
B
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
II
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
+
+
12 to 24 VDC
+
12 to 24 VDC
+
Appendix B
Specifications
DC Input Units (Continued)
Item
Input Voltage
3G2A5-ID219
24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance 3.3 kW
Input Current
7 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
16.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
5.0 VDC max.
ON Delay
1.5 ms max.
OFF Delay
1.5 ms max.
No. of Inputs
64 (8 inputs/common, 8 circuits) (No. of contacts that can be turned ON depends on ambient
temperature. See the characteristic data below.)
Internal Current
Consumption
340 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
600 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
COM
I
II
III
IV
IN 00
to
IN 07
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
IN 00
COM
IN 08
COM
IN 00
COM
IN 08
COM
IN 00
COM
IN 08
(Points)
60
3.3 kW
50
Dimensions
No. of
inputs
40
that can
be turned
30
ON
20
10
3.3 kW
Up to 35 points
can be turned
ON at 55°C.
Temperature is
38°C when 64
points can be
turned ON.
0
0
Temperature
II
24 VDC
Internal
Circuit
470 W
Terminal
Connections
24 VDC
No. of inputs that can be turned ON vs.
temperature
470 W
NC
NC
COM
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
COM
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
B
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
III
NC
NC
COM
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
COM
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
10
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
30 40 50
IV
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
60
(°C)
24 VDC
24 VDC
D-shape
139
Appendix B
Specifications
DC Input Units (Continued)
Item
C500-ID114
Input Voltage
12 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance
1.5 kW
Input Current
7 mA typical (at 12 VDC)
ON Voltage
8.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
ON Delay
1.5 ms max.
OFF Delay
1.5 ms max.
No. of Inputs
64 (8 inputs/common, 8 circuits) (No. of contacts that can be turned ON depends on ambient
temperature. See the characteristic data below.)
Internal Current
Consumption
340 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
600 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
I
II
III
IV
Terminal
Connections
II
12 VDC
12 VDC
Dimensions
140
470 W
COM
D-shape
B
NC 20
NC 19
COM 18
15 17
14 16
13 15
12 14
11 13
10 12
9 11
8 10
COM 9
7 8
6 7
5 6
4 5
3 4
2 3
1 2
0 1
IN 00
to
IN 07
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
IN 00
COM
IN 08
COM
IN 00
COM
IN 08
COM
IN 00
COM
IN 08
A
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1.5 kW
Internal
Circuit
470 W
1.5 kW
III
NC
NC
COM
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
COM
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I
12 VDC
12 VDC
12 VDC
12 VDC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
IV
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
12 VDC
12 VDC
Appendix B
Specifications
DC Input Units (Continued)
Item
C500-ID218CN
Input Voltage
12 to 24 VAC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance
2.2 kW
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
ON Delay
1.5 ms max.
OFF Delay
1.5 ms max.
No. of Inputs
32 (8 inputs/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption
200 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
450 grams max.
Circuit Configuration
2.2 kW
IN 00
to
I
470 W
0.04 mF
IN 07
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
Internal
Circuit
2.2 kW
IN 00
to
II
470 W
0.04 mF
IN 07
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
Terminal Connections
1
2
3
+
4
+
5
6
7
COM
NC
NC
NC
Dimensions
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
A
0
8
12 to 24 VDC
9
10
11
+
12
13
+
14
15
COM
NC
NC
NC
E-shape, with no 4-terminal block
141
Appendix B
Specifications
Dynamic DC Input Unit
3G2A5-ID212
Inputs
Outputs
Input Voltage
24 VDC +10%/–15%
Max. Switching
Capacity
0.1A, 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance
2.2 kW
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
Residual Voltage
1.5 V max.
ON Voltage
10.2 VDC min.
ON Delay
0.2 ms max.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
OFF Delay
0.3 ms max.
ON Delay
OFF Delay
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Power for
24 VDC 10%
External Supply
General Specifications
Terminal Connections
Circuit Configuration
COM
560 W
(24 V)
DATA 0
560 W
to
DATA 7
A
2.2 kW
Internal
Circuit
2.2 kW
24 V
STB 0
to
Internal
Circuit
STB 7
COM
(0 V)
+
24 VDC
No. of Inputs
64, dynamic
Internal Current
Consumption
300 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
450 grams max.
Dimensions
A-shape
142
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
DATA 0
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
COM (24 V)
STB 0
STB 1
STB 2
STB 3
STB 4
STB 5
STB 6
STB 7
COM (0 V)
24 V
NC
Appendix B
Specifications
3G2A5-ID212 Wiring Dynamic Inputs
Connection Example 1 (Keyboard)A
A
0
DATA 0
1
DATA 1
C
2
DATA 2
D
3
DATA 3
4
DATA 4
X
5
DATA 5
Y
6
DATA 6
7
DATA 7
8
COM (24 V)
9
STB 0
10
STB 1
11
STB 2
12
STB 3
13
STB 4
14
STB 5
15
STB 6
16
STB 7
17
COM (0 V)
B
E
Z
+
24 VDC 18
19
Terminal Number
Word n
15
24 VDC
NC
14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
E
D
C
B
A
Word n + 1
Word n + 2
Word n + 3
Z
Y
X
Note Because the DC Input Unit is operated on an extremely small current, make sure there is adequate distance
between the DC Input Unit wires and high-tension equipment or power lines. If this cannot be avoided, use
shielded cables when wiring the DC Input Unit. Be sure to keep the total length of the wires less than 10 m.
143
Appendix B
Specifications
Connection Example 2 (Digital Switches)
0
DATA 0
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
COM (+24)
STB 0
STB 1
STB 2
STB 3
STB 4
STB 5
STB 6
STB 7
COM (0 V)
+24 VDC
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
17
24 VDC
-
Switch no.
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Terminal Number
Word n
15
14
13
12
Switch no. 4
0
1
0
11
10
09
08
Switch no. 3
0
0
0
1
Word n + 1
06
05
04
1
0
0
1
03
02
01
00
0
1
Switch no. 1
1
0
0
STB 0
Switch no. 8
1
07
Switch no. 2
STB 1
0
0
Switch no. 7
0
0
1
1
Switch no. 6
1
STB 3
0
1
1
Switch no. 5
0
0
STB 2
These pulses are input to bits 0 through 7 of word n.
Timing
Data 0 through
7
STB 0
4 ms
STB 1
STB 2
STB 3
STB 4
STB 5
STB 6
STB 7
32 ms
144
-
18
19
D C B A COM
1
0
1
Appendix B
Specifications
AC Input Units
Item
3G2A5-IA121
3G2A5-IA222
Input Voltage
100 to 120 VAC +10%/–15%, 50/60 Hz
200 to 240 VAC +10%/–15%, 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance
9.7 kW (50 Hz), 8 kW (60 Hz)
22 kW (50 Hz), 18 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 100 VAC)
10 mA typical (at 200 VAC)
ON Voltage
60 VAC min.
120 VAC min.
OFF Voltage
20 VAC max.
40 VAC max.
ON Delay
35 ms max.
35 ms max.
OFF Delay
55 ms max.
55 ms max.
No. of Inputs
16 (8 inputs/common, 2 circuits)
16 (8 inputs/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
180 mA, 5 VDC max.
180 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
450 grams max.
450 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
IN 00
560 W
330 kW
0.33 mF
IN 00
1 MW 220 W
220 W
to
to
Internal
Circuit
IN 07
COM
IN 08
560 W
330 kW
0.33 mF
680 W 0.15 mF
1 MW 220 W
220 W
to
IN 15
COM
IN 15
COM
Terminal
Connections
100 to 120VAC ~
100 to 120 VAC ~
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
A-shape
Internal
Circuit
IN 07
COM
IN 08
to
Dimensions
680 W 0.15 mF
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
200 to 240VAC
~
200 to 240 VAC
~
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A-shape
145
Appendix B
Specifications
AC Input Units (Continued)
Item
3G2A5-IA122
C500-IA223
Input Voltage
100 to 120 VAC +10%/–15%, 50/60 Hz
200 to 240 VAC +10%/–15%, 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance
9.7 kW (50 Hz), 8 kW (60 Hz)
22 kW (50 Hz), 18 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 100 VAC)
10 mA typical (at 200 VAC)
ON Voltage
60 VAC min.
120 VAC min.
OFF Voltage
20 VAC max.
40 VAC max.
ON Delay
35 ms max.
35 ms max.
OFF Delay
55 ms max.
55 ms max.
No. of Inputs
32 (8 inputs/common, 4 circuits)
32 (8 inputs/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
180 mA, 5 VDC max.
180 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
600 grams max.
600 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
IN 00
to
IN 07
I
330 kW
IN 00
to
IN 07
220 W
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
IN 00
to
IN 07
II
330 W 0.33 mF
I
330 W 0.33 mF
330 kW
IN 00
to
IN 07
220 W
COM
II
100 to 120 ~
VAC
Dimensions
146
A
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
COM 8
8 9
9 10
10 11
11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
COM 17
NC 18
I
100 to 120 ~
VAC
C-shape
1 MW 270 W
Internal
Circuit
560 W 0.15 mF
1 MW 270 W
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
Terminal
Connections
0.15 mF
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
Internal
Circuit
560 W
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
II
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
A
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
COM 8
8 9
9 10
10 11
11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
COM 17
NC 18
I
~ 100 to 120
200 to 240 ~
VAC
VAC
~ 100 to 120
200 to 240 ~
VAC
VAC
NC
C-shape
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
II
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
~ 200 to 240
VAC
~ 200 to 240
VAC
Appendix B
Specifications
AC/DC Input Units
Item
3G2A5-IM211
3G2A5-IM212
Input Voltage
12 to 24 VAC/DC +10%/–15%, 50/60 Hz
12 to 24 VAC/DC +10%/–15%, 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance
1.8 W
2.2 kW
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
10.2 VDC min.
10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
3.0 VDC max.
ON Delay
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
OFF Delay
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
No. of Inputs
16 (8 inputs/common, 2 circuits)
32 (8 inputs/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
10 mA, 5 VDC max.
200 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
450 grams max.
500 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
IN 00
IN 00
to
IN 07
1.8 kW
to
I
1.8 kW
IN 06
IN 07
COM
IN 08
1.8 kW
II
2.2 kW
680 W
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
0
Terminal
Connections
NC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
NC
19
1
2
3
+
12 to 24
VAC/VDC
~
+
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
+
12 to 24
VAC/VDC
~
+
12
13
14
15
COM
Dimensions
Internal
Circuit
IN 00
to
IN 07
to
IN 14
IN 15
COM
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
Internal
Circuit
1.8 kW
2.2 kW
680 W
A-shape
I
+
~
+
12 to 24
VAC/VDC
+
~
+
12 to 24
VAC/VDC
A
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
COM 8
8 9
9 10
10 11
11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
COM17
NC 18
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
II
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
+
~
+
12 to 24
VAC/VDC
+
~
+
12 to 24
VAC/VDC
NC
A-shape
147
Appendix B
Specifications
TTL Input Units
Item
C500-ID501CN
Input Voltage
5 VDC 10%
Input Impedance
1 kW
Input Current
3.5 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage
3 VDC min.
OFF Voltage
1 VDC max.
ON Delay
1.5 ms max.
OFF Delay
1.5 ms max.
No. of Inputs
32 (8 inputs/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption
200 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
450 grams max.
Circuit Configuration
1 kW
IN 00
to
I
3.3 kW
IN 07
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
Internal
Circuit
1 kW
IN 00
to
II
3.3 kW
IN 07
COM
IN 08
to
IN 15
COM
Terminal Connections
B
1
1 2
2 3
3 4
4 5
5 6
6 7
7 8
8 9
9 10
10 11
11 12
12
A
5 VDC
0
1
2
3
+
4
5
6
7
COM
NC
NC
NC
Use a sinking TTL buffer.
(TTL/LS-TTL/CMOS buffer)
IN
1 kW
+
3.3k
W
COM
Dimensions
148
E-shape, with no 4-terminal block
8
5 VDC
9
10
11
+
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
NC
+
Appendix B
Specifications
Triac Output Units
Item
3G2A5-OA121
3G2A5-OA222
Max. Switching
Capacity
1 A, 132 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/common, 5 A/Unit)
1 A, 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/common, 5 A/Unit)
Min. Switching
Capacity
10 mA (resistive load) , 10 VAC
40 mA (inductive load), 10 VAC
10 mA (resistive load), 10 VAC
40 mA (inductive load), 10 VAC
Leakage Current
3 mA (100 VAC) max.
3 mA max. at 100 VAC
6 mA max. at 200 VAC
Residual Voltage
1.2 V max.
1.2 V max.
ON Delay
1 ms max.
1 ms max.
OFF Delay
1/2 of load frequency max.
1/2 of load frequency max.
No. of Outputs
16 (8 outputs/common, 2 circuits)
16 (8 outputs/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
300 mA, 5 VDC max.
300 mA, 5 VDC max.
Fuse Capacity
5 A, 250 V (two fuses)
5 A, 250 V (two fuses)
Weight
500 grams max.
500 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
OUT 00
OUT 00
22 W
22 W
to
Internal
Circuit
0.022 mF
Fuse/fuse blowout
detection circuit
OUT 06
OUT 07
COM
to
Internal
Circuit
0.022 mF
Fuse/fuse blowout
detection circuit
OUT 08
OUT 06
OUT 07
COM
OUT 08
22 W
22 W
to
to
0.022 mF
Fuse/fuse blowout
detection circuit
The fuse is 5 A, 250 V and 6.35 mm dia. x 32 mm.
Terminal
Connections
L
L
L
L
132 VAC max. ~
L
L
L
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
L
L
L
L
132 VAC max. ~
L
L
L
L
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
Dimensions
A-shape
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
0.022 mF
Fuse/fuse blowout
detection circuit
OUT 14
OUT 15
COM
OUT 14
OUT 15
COM
The fuse is 5 A, 250 V; 6.35 mm dia. x 32 mm.
L
L
L
L
250 VAC max. ~
L
L
L
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
L
L
L
L
250 VAC max. ~
L
L
L
L
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
NC
NC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A-shape
149
Appendix B
Specifications
Triac Output Units (Continued)
Item
3G2A5-OA223
C500-OA225
Max. Switching
Capacity
1 A, 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/common, 5 A/Unit)
1 A, 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/common, 5 A/Unit)
Min. Switching
Capacity
10 mA (resistive load) , 10 VAC
40 mA (inductive load), 10 VAC
10 mA (resistive load) , 10 VAC
40 mA (inductive load), 10 VAC
Leakage Current
3 mA (100 VAC) max., 6 mA (200 VAC) max.
2 mA (100 VAC) max., 5 mA (200 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage
1.2 V max.
1.6 V max.
ON Delay
1 ms max.
1 ms max.
OFF Delay
1/2 of load frequency max.
1/2 of load frequency max.
No. of Outputs
24 (8 outputs/common, 3 circuits)
32 (8 outputs/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
450 mA, 5 VDC max.
200 mA, 5 VDC max.
Fuse Capacity
5 A, 250 V (three fuses)
Not provided
Power for External --Supply
320 mA, 5 VDC 10% max.
Weight
600 grams max.
600 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
OUT 00
to
OUT 06
OUT 07
COM
OUT 04
F./b.f.d.
Internal
Circuit
*
to
to
x
*
II
F./b. f. d. Fuse/blown fuse detection
Fuse: MF51SH (5 A, 250 V)
I
L
L
250 VAC
L
max.
L
L
~
L
L
L
COM
L
L
250 VAC
L
max.
L
L
~
L
L
L
COM
L
V
~
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
150
C-shape
OUT 15
COM
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM
OUT 08
to
II
OUT 15
COM
24 VDC
0V
* G3S-201PL 24 VDC
II
I
250 VAC
max.
250 VAC
max.
~
~
COM
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC Fuse blowout
NC
NC Output 2A,
NC 250 VAC/
NC 24 VDC
250 VAC
max.
~
+
Dimensions
I
to
OUT 06
OUT 07
COM
Fuse blowout
Output
F./b.f.d.
Terminal
Connections
Internal
Circuit
OUT 14
OUT 15
COM
OUT 00
F./b.f.d.
to
OUT 07
COM
OUT 08
I
Internal
Circuit
OUT 00
L 0
L 1
2
L
3
L
L 4
L 5
6
L
7
L
COM
8
L
9
L
10
L
L 11
L 12
L 13
L 14
L 15
COM
0V
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B
II
0 0 L
1
1
L
2 2 L
250 VAC
3 3 L
max.
4 4 L
~
5 5 L
6 6 L
7 7 L
8 COM
9 8 L
10 9 L
11 10 L
250 VAC
12 11 L
max.
13 12 L
~
14 13 L
15 14 L
16 15 L
17 COM
18 24 VDC
+ 24 VDC
C-shape
Appendix B
Specifications
Special Considerations for C500-OA225
Environment temperature
25°C
1.0
Current
value per 0.8
point (A)
40°C
55°C
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Number of points per common that
can be turned ON simultaneously.
Number of Points per Common Turned ON Simultaneously
Surge
15
Current
(A. Peak)
10
5
0
10
30
50
100 200
500
1,000
5.000
Current-carrying time (ms)
151
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Units
Item
3G2A5-OD411
3G2A5-OD412
Max. Switching
Capacity
12 to 48 VDC +10%/–15%, 1 A
(but, 4 A/common, 5 A/Unit)
12 to 48 VDC +10%/–15%, 0.3 A
(but, 4.8 A/Unit)
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.4 V max.
1.5 V max.
ON Delay
0.2 ms max.
0.2 ms max.
OFF Delay
0.3 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
No. of Outputs
16 (16 outputs/common, 1 circuit)
32 (32 outputs/common, 1 circuit)
Internal Current
Consumption
160 mA, 5 VDC max.
230 mA, 5 VDC max.
Fuse Capacity
5 A, 250 V (two fuses)
1 per circuit, 1 total
(Cannot be changed by user.)
Power for
External Supply
50 mA, 12 to 48 VDC 10% min.
80 mA, 12 to 48 VDC 10% min.
Weight
500 grams max.
530 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
OUT 00
to
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM (0 V)
Internal
Circuit
Internal
Circuit
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
*
Internal
Circuit
Internal
Circuit
OUT 15
COM(0 V)
+V
12 to 48
VDC
*
Fuse
OUT 07
COM (0 V)
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM (0 V)
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM (0 V)
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM (0 V)
12 to 48
VDC
* Fuse/fuse blowout detection circuit
Terminal
Connections
12 to 48
VDC
0
L
1
L
2
L
3
+
L
4
L
5
L
6
L
7
L
COM (0 V)
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
L
14
L
15
L
COM (0 V)
12 to 48 VDC
NC
Dimensions
152
A-shape
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Note: Be sure to
supply power to
B18; otherwise
current will leak
through the load
while the output is
OFF.
Because the
commons are
short-circuited
internally, they
cannot be used
separately and
must be wired
according to the
diagram.
12 to 48
VDC
+
Note: Be sure to
supply power to
B18; otherwise
current will leak
through the load
while the output
is OFF.
Because the
commons are
short-circuited
internally, they
cannot be used
separately and
must be wired
according to the
diagram.
B-shape
I
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM(0 V)
L 8
L 9
L 10
L 11
L 12
L 13
L 14
L 15
COM(0 V)
NC
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
II
B
0 0 L
1 1 L
2 2 L
3 3 L
4 4 L
5 5 L
6 6 L
7 7 L
8 COM(0 V)
9 8 L
10 9 L
11 10 L
12 11 L
13 12 L
14 13 L
15 14 L
16 15 L
17 COM(0 V)
18 12 to 48 VDC
I
II
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Units (Continued)
Item
3G2A5-OD414
Max. Switching
Capacity
12 to 48 VDC +10%/–15%, 0.3 A
(but, 2.4 A/common; 4.8 A/Unit)
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.5 V max.
ON Delay
0.2 ms max.
OFF Delay
0.3 ms max.
No. of Outputs
32 (16 outputs/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
230 mA, 5 VDC max.
Fuse Capacity
Not provided
Power for
External Supply
80 mA, 12 to 48 VDC 10% min.
Weight
530 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
Internal
Circuit
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM0 (0 V)
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM1 (0 V)
12 to 48 VDC
Internal
Circuit
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM2 (0 V)
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM3 (0 V)
Internal
Circuit
I
II
12 to 48 VDC
Terminal
Connections
I
Supply power
to A18 and
B18. Without
power supplied
to A18 and
B18, leakage
current will
cause a
malfunction at
the load.
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM0 (0V)
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM1 (0V)
+
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
12 to 48 VDC
Dimensions
A
II
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM2 (0V)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
15
L
17 COM3 (0V)
16
18
+DC
12 to 48 V
+
12 to 48 VDC
B-shape
153
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Units (Continued)
Item
3G2A5-OD213
Max. Switching
Capacity
16 mA/4.5 V to 100 mA/26.4 VDC (See chart below.) (but, 800 mA/common, 6.4 A/Unit)
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.4 V max.
ON Delay
0.2 ms max.
OFF Delay
0.3 ms max.
No. of Outputs
64 (8 outputs/common, 8 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
460 mA, 5 VDC max. (140 mA + (5 mA x no. of ON points))
Fuse
1 per circuit, 8 total (Cannot be changed by user.)
Power for
External Supply
170 mA, 26.4 VDC min. (2.6 mA x no. of ON points)
Weight
550 grams max.
154
Appendix B
Specifications
Item
3G2A5-OD213
Circuit Configuration
Units manufactured on or before October 31st, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 31X9 or earlier*)
Units manufactured on or after November 1st, 1999
(manufacturing numbers 01Y9 or later*)
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
13 kW
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
6.8 kW
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
10 kW
Fuse
13 kW
Internal
Circuit
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
15 kW
I
Internal
Circuit
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM
10 kW
6.8 kW
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
I
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
15 kW
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
IV
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM
IV
*Manufacturing Numbers
jjY9
Year: Last digit of calendar year; e.g., 1999→9, 2000→0
Month: 1 to 9 (January to September), X (October), Y (November), Z (December)
Day: 01 to 31
Max. switching capacity
(mA)
100
Max.
switching
capacity
50
16
0
0
4.5
10
20.4
Voltage for external supply
26.4
(V)
155
Appendix B
Specifications
Item
3G2A5-OD213
Terminal
Connections
II
+
+
Dimensions
156
D-shape
COM
L 15
L14
L 13
L 12
L 11
L 10
L 9
L 8
COM
L 7
L 6
L 5
L 4
L 3
L 2
L 1
L 0
B A
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
III
I
COM
1
L
5
14
L
13
L
12
L
11 L
1
L
09
L
8
L
COM
7
L
6
L
5
L
4
L
3 L
2 L
1
L
0
L
+
+
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
COM
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L 8
L 9
L 10
L 11
+
L12
L13
L14
L15
COM
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
IV
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
COM
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
COM
4.5 to 26.4 VDC
When wiring output
circuits, be sure to
use the correct polarity for the external
power supplies. Wiring with incorrect
polarity may result in
erroneous operation
of the load.
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Units (Continued)
Item
3G2A5-OD215
C500-OD217
Max. Switching
Capacity
24 VDC 10%, 50 mA/point
12 to 24 VDC
A
(but, 4 A/common, 5 A/Unit)
Leakage Current
---
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.0 V max.
1.4 V max.
ON Delay
0.2 ms max.
0.2 ms max.
OFF Delay
0.3 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
No. of Outputs
16 (independent commons)
16 (8 outputs/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
200 mA, 5 VDC max.
160 mA, 5 VDC max.
Fuse Capacity
Not provided
5 A, 250 V (two fuses)
Power for
External Supply
---
50 mA, 12 to 24 VDC 10% min.
Weight
530 grams max.
500 grams max.
+10%/
–15%, 1
Circuit
Configuration
OUT 00
Internal
Circuit
OUT 00
COM
OUT 01
COM
to
Internal
Circuit
to
OUT 07
COM
Internal
Circuit
Fuse/fuse
blowout
detection
12 to
24 VDC
OUT 08
Internal
Circuit
OUT 14
COM
OUT 15
to
OUT 15
COM
COM
Fuse/fuse
blowout
detection
Terminal
Connections
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
24 VDC
Dimensions
B-shape
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NC
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NC
NC
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B 0
0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 NC
9 8
10 9
11 10
12 11
13 12
14 13
15 14
16 15
17 NC
18 NC
12 to 24
VDC
12 to 24
VDC
0 0
L
1 1
L
2 2
L
3 3
+
L
4 4
L
5 5
L
6 6
L
7 7
L
COM (0 V) 8
8 9
L
9 10
L
10 11
L
11 12
+
L
12 13
L
13 14
L
14 15
L
15 16
L
COM (0 V) 17
12 to 24 VDC 18
12 to 24 VDC
19
12 to
24 VDC
Note:
Be sure to
connect Power
Supplies to 18
and 19.
A-shape
157
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Units (Continued)
Item
C500-OD218
C500-OD219
+10%/
–15%, 0.3
+10%/
–15%,
Max. Switching
Capacity
12 to 24 VDC
A
(but, 2.4 A/common, 4.8 A/Unit)
12 to 24 VDC
2.1 A
(but, 8 A/common, 16 A/Unit)
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.5 V max.
0.7 V max.
ON Delay
0.2 ms max.
0.2 ms max.
OFF Delay
0.3 ms max.
0.4 ms max.
No. of Outputs
32 (16 outputs/common, 2 circuits)
16 (8 outputs/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
230 mA, 5 VDC max.
160 mA, 5 VDC max.
Fuse Capacity
1 per circuit, 2 total
(Cannot be changed by user.)
10 A, 250 V (two fuses)
Power for
External Supply
80 mA, 12 to 24 VDC 10% min.
100 mA, 12 to 24 VDC 10% min.
Weight
530 grams max.
550 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
Internal
Circuit
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
Terminal
Connections
Dimensions
158
I
L 0
L 1
12 to 24
2
L
VDC
3
+
L
L 4
L 5
Note:
L 6
Be sure to
L 7
COM(0 V)
supply power
8
to A18 and
L
9
B18.
L
A8, A17, B8,
10
L
and B17 are
L 11
short-circuite
L 12
d internally,
L 13
so they
L 14
cannot be
L 15
used
COM(0 V)
separately.
12 to 24 VDC
A8 and B8
do not have
to be wired.
B-shape
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM
(0 V)
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM
(0 V)
12 to
24 VDC
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM
(0 V)
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM
(0 V)
12 to
24 VDC
II 12 to 24
VDC
0
L
1
L
2
L
3
+
L
4
L
5
L
6
L
7
L
COM(0 V)
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
L
14
L
15
L
COM(0 V)
12 to 24 VDC
OUT 00
I
Internal
Circuit I
to
Inter
nal
Circ
uit II
Fuse
OUT 07
COM0
12 to 24
VDC
OUT 08
Inter
nal
Circ
uit II
II
to
Fuse
OUT 15
COM1
12 to 24
VDC
12 to 24
VDC
12 to 24
VDC
A-shape
0
L
1
L
2
L
3
+
L
4
L
5
L
6
L
7
L
COM
0
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
+
L
12
L
13
L
14
L
15
L
COM 1
12 to 24 VDC
12 to 24 VDC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Note:
Be sure to
supply power to
18 and 19.
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Units (Continued)
Item
C500-OD415CN
Max. Switching Capacity
12 to 48 VDC +10%/–15%, 0.3 A
(but, 2.4 A/common, 4.8 A/Unit)
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.5 V max.
ON Delay
0.2 ms max.
OFF Delay
0.3 ms max.
No. of Outputs
32 (16 outputs/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption
230 mA, 5 VDC max.
Fuse Capacity
Not provided
Power for External Supply
80 mA, 12 to 48 VDC 10% min.
Weight
530 grams max.
Circuit Configuration
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM 0
V0
Internal
Circuit
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM 1
V1
12 to
48 VDC
Internal
Circuit
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM 2
V2
Internal
Circuit
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM 3
V3
12 to
48 VDC
Terminal Connections (CNI and
CNII)
A
0 1
1
L
2
2
L
3
3
L
4
4
L
5
5
L
6
6
L
7
7
L
8
COM
9
V
10
NC 11
NC 12
L
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
15
L
COM
V
NC
NC
I
II
Note: Power can be supplied
to either connector pins A9,
B9, A10, and B10 or to
terminal bock terminals 1 to
4. If power is not supplied,
dark current will leak through
the load while the output is
OFF.
The following pins are
connected internally:
+ CNI: A9, B9, and terminal 2;
A10, B10 and terminal 1.
CNII: A9, B9, and terminal 4;
A10, B10 and terminal 3
To common load
I
II
1
2
3
4
V
COM
12 to 48 VDC
V
COM
Terminal Block
Dimensions
E-shape
159
Appendix B
Specifications
Transistor Output Units (Continued)
Item
3G2A5-OD211 (dynamic)
3G2A5-OD212 (PNP)
+10%/
–15%
12 to 24 VDC +10%/–15%, 0.3 A
(but, 2.4 A/common, 4.8 A/Unit)
Max. Switching
Capacity
24 VDC
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
1.5 V max.
1.5 V max.
ON Delay
0.2 ms max.
0.2 ms max.
OFF Delay
0.3 ms max.
0.3 ms max.
No. of Outputs
64 (dynamic)
32 (16 outputs/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
300 mA, 5 VDC max.
230 mA, 5 VDC max.
Fuses
Not provided.
1 per circuit, 2 total
(Cannot be changed by user.)
Power for
External Supply
50 mA, 24 VDC 10% min.
50 mA, 12 to 24 VDC 10% min.
Weight
450 grams max.
530 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
DATA 0
to
OUT 00
to
DATA 7
COM (0 V)
Internal
Circuit
Internal
Circuit
STB 0
Fuse
Internal
Circuit
Internal
Circuit
OUT 07
COM I (+DC) I
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM I (+DC)
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM II (+DC)
II
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM II (+DC)
to
STB 7
COM (0 V)
24 VDC
Fuse
0VI
0 V II
DATA: Positive logic output
STB: Negative logic output
Terminal
Connections
Terminal Connections
A
+
24 VDC
Dimensions
160
A-shape
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
I
DATA 0
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
COM (0 V)
STB 0
STB 1
STB 2
STB 3
STB 4
STB 5
STB 6
STB 7
COM (0 V)
24 V
NC
L
12 tO 24
VDC
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COMI(DC)
Note:
A8 and A17 are
connected
internally, as
are B8 and
B17; they
cannot be used
independently.
Wire according
to the diagram
to prevent
insufficient
current flow.
B-shape
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COMI(DC)
0V
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
II
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COMII(DC)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
17 COMII(DC)
18
0 V II
12 tO
24 VDC
+
Appendix B
Specifications
Wiring Dynamic Outputs (3G2A5-OD211)
24 kW 1 W
24 kW 1 W
24 VDC
0
DATA 0
1
DATA 1
2
DATA 2
3
DATA 3
4
DATA 4
5
DATA 5
6
DATA 6
7
DATA 7
8
CON (0 V)
9
STB 0
10
STB 1
11
STB 2
12
STB 3
13
STB 4
14
STB 5
15
STB 6
16
STB 7
17
CON (0 V)
18
24 VDC
19
NC
6 5 4 3 7
1
11
Display no.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Point Number
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Data Number
Word n
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
Display no. 4
0
1
0
Display no. 3
0
0
0
1
Display no. 2
1
STB 1
Word n + 1
0
STB 3
0
1
Display no. 1
0
0
0
0
1
STB 0
Display no. 8
1
0
0
Display no. 7
0
0
1
1
Display no. 6
1
0
1
1
Display no. 5
0
0
1
0
1
STB 2
Note Because the DC Input Unit is operated on an extremely small current, make sure there is adequate distance
between the DC Input Unit wires and high-tension equipment or power lines. If this cannot be avoided, use
shielded cables when wiring the DC Input Unit. Be sure to keep the total length of the wires less than 10 m.
161
Appendix B
Specifications
Timing
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
1 ms
STB 0
2 ms
1 ms
STB 1
STB 2
STB 3
STB 4
STB 5
STB 6
STB 7
4 ms
32 ms
Bits 0 through 7 of word n are output as these pulses.
162
Appendix B
Specifications
Contact Output Units
Item
3G2A5-OC221
3G2A5-OC223
Max. Switching
Capacity
2 A, 250 VAC (cosf= 1),
0.5 A, 250 VAC (cosf= 0.4)
2 A, 24 VDC (but, 8 A/common,16 A/Unit)
2 A, 250 VAC (cosf= 1),
0.5 A, 250 VAC (cosf= 0.4),
2 A, 24 VDC (but, 32 A/Unit)
Min. Switching
Capacity
10 mA, 5 VDC
10 mA, 5 VDC
Power for
External Supply
Voltage: 24 VDC 10 %
Current: 10 mA/point, 160 mA/Unit
Voltage: 24 VDC 10 %
Current: 10 mA/point, 160 mA/Unit
Relay
G6B-114P-FD-US-M (24 VDC) w/socket
G6B-114P-FD-US-M (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of
Relay
Electrical: 300,000 operations (resistive load)
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
Electrical: 300,000 operations (resistive load)
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Delay
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
OFF Delay
15 ms max.
15 ms max.
No. of Outputs
16 (8 outputs/common, 2 circuits)
16 (independent commons)
Internal Current
Consumption
100 mA, 5 VDC max.
100 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
450 grams max.
450 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
x
x
OUT 00
OUT 00
COM
to
to
OUT 07
COM
Internal
Circuit
Internal
Circuit
OUT 08
x
Relays are mounted on sockets and are
replaceable.
Terminal
Connections
+
250 VAC 24
VDC max.
~
+
+
250 VAC 24
VDC max.
+
~
+
L 0
L 1
L 2
L 3
L 4
L 5
L 6
L 7
COM
L 8
L 9
L 10
L 11
L 12
L 13
L 14
L 15
COM
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Internal
Circuit
OUT 07
COM
Internal
Circuit
x
to
OUT 08
COM
to
OUT 15
COM
24 VDC
0V
OUT 15
COM
24 VDC
0V
Relays are mounted on sockets and are
replaceable.
+
+~
~
+
+~
+~
+~
+~
+~
~
250 VAC 24
VDC max.
L 0
L 1
L 2
L 3
L 4
L 5
L 6
L 7
NC
L 8
L 9
L 10
L 11
L 12
L 13
L 14
L 15
NC
+~
+~
~
+~
+~
+
~
+~
+~
+
+
24 VDC
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 NC
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 NC
18
24 VDC
Dimensions
A-shape
B-shape
163
Appendix B
Specifications
Contact Output Units (Continued)
Item
3G2A5-OC224
Max. Switching Capacity
2 A, 250 VAC (cosf= 1),
0.5 A, 250 VAC (cosf= 0.4)
2 A, 24 VDC
(8 A/common, 32 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity
10 mA, 5 VDC
Power for External Supply
Voltage: 24 VDC 10 %
Current: 10 mA/point, 320 mA/Unit
Relay
G6B-114P-FD-US-M (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay
Electrical: 300,000 operations (resistive load) 100,000
operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Delay
15 ms max.
OFF Delay
15 ms max.
No. of Outputs
32 (8 outputs/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption
200 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
600 grams max.
Circuit Configuration
x
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
COM
OUT 08
OUT 15
COM
OUT 00
Internal
Circuit
Internal
Circuit
x
I
to
OUT 07
COM
OUT 08
OUT 15
COM
24 VDC
0V
Terminal Connections
250 VAC
24 VDC
max.
+
+
250 VAC
24 VDC
max.
+
Dimensions
164
A B
0 0 0
L
1
1
L 2 1 2
L 3 2 3
L 4 3 4
4
L
~
5 5 5
L
6 6 6
L
7 7 7
L
COM 8 8
9
8
L 9 9 10
L 10 10 11
L 11 11 12
12
L
12 13 13
L
~
13 14 14
L
14 15 15
L
15 16 16
L
COM 17 17
+
18
18
24 VDC
I
C-shape
+
II
0
L
1
L
2
L
3
L
4
L
5
L
6
L
7
L
COM
8
L
9
L
10
L
11
L
12
L
13
L
14
L
15
L
COM
II
250 VAC
24 VDC
+ max.
~
+
250 VAC
24 VDC
+ max.
~
+
Appendix B
Specifications
TTL Output Unit
Item
C500-OD501CN
Max. Switching Capacity
5 VDC 10% 35 mA/point
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage
0.4 V max.
ON Delay
0.2 ms max.
OFF Delay
0.3 ms max.
No. of Outputs
32 (8 outputs/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption
250 mA, 5 VDC max.
Fuse Capacity
Not provided
Power for External Supply
32 mA, 5 VDC 10% min.
Weight
450 grams max.
Circuit Configuration
5 VDC
10 kW
10 kW
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
I
COM
5 VDC
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM
5 VDC
12 kW
Internal
Circuit
10 kW
10 kW
5 VDC
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
COM
5 VDC
NC
NC
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
IV
COM
5 VDC
OUT 08
to
OUT 15
COM
12 kW
Terminal Connections
OUT 00
to
OUT 07
5 VDC
L
L
L
L
+
L
L
L
15
L
COM
5 VDC
NC
NC
Because the output data is negative logic, the terminal
output goes low when the output bit is ON (1).
TTL
10 kW
+
10 kW
12 kW
Dimensions
E-shape
165
Appendix B
Specifications
DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
C500-MD211CN
Output (CNI, word n)
Input (CNII, word n+1)
+10%/
–15%,
Max. Switching
Capacity
12 to 24 VDC
0.3 A
(but, 2.4 A/common, 4.8 A/Unit)
Input Voltage
12 to 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Leakage Current
0.1 mA max.
Input Impedance
2.2 W
Residual Voltage
1.5 V max.
Input Current
10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
Fuses
1 per circuit, 2 total
(Cannot be changed by user.)
ON Voltage
10.2 VDC min.
Power for
External Supply
80 mA, 12 to 24 VDC 10% max.
OFF Voltage
3.0 VDC max.
ON Delay
0.2 ms max.
ON Delay
1.5 ms max.
OFF Delay
0.3 ms max.
OFF Delay
1.5 ms max.
No. of Outputs
16 (8 outputs/common, 2 circuits)
No. of Inputs
16 (8 inputs/common, 2
circuits)
Internal Current
Consumption
260 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight
520 grams max.
Circuit
Configuration
CNI
OUT 00
to
Internal
Circuit
Internal
Circuit
Fuse
OUT 07
COM(0 V)
12 to 24
VDC
CNII
2.2 kW
IN 00
to
0.047 mF
470 W
IN 07
COM
Internal
Circuit
2.2 kW
Fuse
Terminal
Connections
OUT 00
to
IN 08
OUT 07
COM(0 V)
IN 15
COM
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Note Select one of the connectors A9, A10,
B9, B10, or terminal blocks 1 through 4,
and wire them as power and common
lines.
Dimensions
166
E-shape
0.047 mF
470 W
12 to 24
VDC
A B
12 to
CNI
1 1 8 L 24 VDC
2 2 9 L
3 3 10 L
+
+
4 4 11 L
5 5 12 L
6 6 13 L
7 7 14 L
8 8 15 L
COM0 (0 v) 9
9 COM1 (0 V)
V 0 (12 to 24 VDC)
V 1 (12 to 24 VDC)
10 10
NC 11 11 NC
NC 12 12 NC
To common load
(Terminal)
1 + V0
12 tO 48
2 COM0
VDC
3 + V1
COM1
4
12 to
24 VDC
to
12 to 24
VDC
+
+
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM2
NC
NC
NC
B
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10 10
11 11
12 12
12 to 24
8
VDC
9
10
11
+
12
+
13
14
15
COM3
NC
NC
NC
Note The maximum switching capacity
for solderless connectors is 1 A/
common.
CNII
Appendix B
Specifications
Dummy I/O Unit
Item
Selection Function
3G2A5-DUM01
Internal Current Consumption
Unit designation: input/output
Point designation: 16/32/64 points
35 mA, 5 VDC max.
Power for External Supply
30 mA, 24 VDC 10% min.
Weight
450 grams max.
Short-circuit:
Open:
Terminal Connections
Point
designation
16 points
32 points
64 points
input
output
Terminal
connection
Open 3,4, and 5
Short 3 and 4.
Open 5.
Short 4 and 5.
Open 3.
+
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
24 VDC
Dimensions
A-shape
Note Power is supplied to the Dummy I/O Unit from the 24 VDC output terminal of the Power Supply Unit mounted
on the same Rack as the Dummy I/O Unit. Be sure to supply power to the Dummy I/O Unit before supplying
power to the CPU. If power is supplied to the Dummy I/O Unit after power is supplied to the CPU, the Dummy
I/O Unit is assumed to have only 16 I/O points, and may result in an I/O Verification Error or an I/O Setting
Error.
167
Appendix B
Specifications
I/O Power Supply Unit
Item
CV500-IPS01
Input Voltage
100 through 120 VAC/200 through 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Allowable Input Voltage Range
85 to 132 VAC/170 to 264 VAC
Input Current
160 VA max.
Output Capacity
2 A, 24 VDC
Dimensions
34.5 x 250 x 116 mm (WxHxD)
Weight
700 grams max.
Power Indicator
Lights when power
is supplied.
AC Power Source
Supply a voltage of 100 to 120 VAC
or 200 to 240 VAC
Power
Supply
System
Control
Circuit
Power
Detection
Circuit
Dimensions
168
24 VDC Output
Use these terminals to supply power to the
DC Input Units. These terminals can supply a
current of up to 2 A. If a current higher than 2
A is required, add a number of I/O Power
Supply Units or use a separate power supply.
Since the PC assumes a current exceeding 2
A from these terminals is a battery error, it
terminates the output these terminals.
Power ON Output
These terminals are internally short-circuited
while power is ON (24 VDC output). The
maximum switching capacity of the terminals
are as follows: 2 A, 250 VAC (cosf = 1) 0.5 A,
250 VAC (cosf = 1) 2 A, 24 VDC
Appendix B
Specifications
Dimensions
CPU Racks
Note 1.The above diagram shows the CPU Rack with the Power Supply Unit and I/O
Control Unit removed. Remove these Units when mounting or disconnecting the CPU Rack.
2.The Power Supply Unit is shown with its dimensions when mounted.
Expansion CPU Racks
Note 1.The above diagram shows the Expansion CPU Rack with the Power Supply
Unit and I/O Interface Unit removed. Remove these Units when mounting or
disconnecting the CPU Rack.
2.The Power Supply Unit is shown with its dimensions when mounted.
169
Appendix B
Specifications
Expansion I/O Racks
Expansion I/O Rack Backplane
CPU Unit
CVM1D-CPU21
250
47
170
93
103.5
Appendix B
Specifications
Duplex Unit
CVM1D-DPL01
Power Supply Units
CVM1D-PA208/212
250
47
93
116
I/O Control Units
CV500-IC101/IC201/IC301
250
34.5
71
93
171
Appendix B
Specifications
I/O Interface Units
CV500-II101/II201
Terminating Resistance Unit
CV500-TER01
37
Weight: 50 g
12
68
Expansion Data Memory Units (EM Units)
CV500-DM641/DM151/DM251
62
80
Backplanes
CVM1D-BC051/BI101/BI102
250
W
39.6
Model
CVM1D-BC051 (CPU Rack)
CVM1D-BI101 (Expansion CPU Rack)
CVM1D-BI102 (Expansion I/O Rack)
172
W
486
Specifications
Appendix B
Type-A I/O Units
Type-B I/O Units
173
Specifications
Type-C I/O Units
Type-D I/O Units
174
Appendix B
Appendix B
Specifications
Type-E I/O Units
250
93
34.5
139
Terminal Block Dimensions (Common to A, B, C)
Note Use the common short-circuit implement (PTC-38S) provided with the type-C Unit to connect terminals (1)
and (2) in the following diagram. The current capacity is 5 A.
Weights
Model
Weight (gram)
CVM1D-CPU21
700
CVM1D-DPL01
550
CV500-PA208/212
900
CV500-IC101/201
380
CV500-IC301
270
CV500-II101/201
CVM1D-BC051, CVM1D-BI101/102
CV500-DM641/151/251
400
1,900
40
175
Appendix B
Specifications
Connecting Cables
Cable name
CPU Bus Cable (for
connecting Expansion CPU
Rack)
I/O Cable ((for connecting
g
R k Expansion
E
i CPU
CPU Rack,
Rack or Expansion I/O Rack)
Rack,
Model
Cable length (L)
Weight
CV500-CN311
0.3 m
110 g
CV500-CN611
0.6 m
150 g
CV500-CN312
CV500-CN612
CV500-CN122
CV500-CN222
0.3 m
0.6 m
1m
2m
140 g
180 g
240 g
380 g
CV500-CN332
3m
520 g
CV500-CN522
5m
800 g
CV500-CN132
10 m
1.6 kg
CV500-CN232
20 m
3.0 kg
CV500-CN332
30 m
4.4 kg
CV500-CN432
40 m
5.8 kg
CV500-CN532
50 m
7.2 kg
Connector dimensions (W x H x D)
60 x 42 x 12 mm
68 x 45 x 12 mm
Note Do not put the Connecting Cables in the same duct with power lines or I/O wiring.
Cable Dimensions
L
H
W
176
D
Glossary
address
A number used to identify the location of data or programming instructions in
memory or to identify the location of a network or a unit in a network.
advanced instruction
An instruction input with a function code that handles data processing operations within ladder diagrams, as opposed to a basic instruction, which makes up
the fundamental portion of a ladder diagram.
AGF
All-glass optical fiber cable; also known as crystal optical fiber cable.
allocation
The process by which the PC assigns certain bits or words in memory for various
functions. This includes pairing I/O bits to I/O points on Units.
analog
Something that represents or can process a continuous range of values as opposed to values that can be represented in distinct increments. Something that
represents or can process values represented in distinct increments is called
digital.
Analog I/O Unit
I/O Units that convert I/O between analog and digital values. An Analog Input
Unit converts an analog input to a digital value for processing by the PC. An Analog Output Unit converts a digital value to an analog output.
AND
A logic operation whereby the result is true if and only if both premises are true.
In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually ON/OFF states of bits
or the logical combination of such states called execution conditions.
APF
An acronym for all-plastic optical fiber cable.
area
See data area and memory area.
area prefix
A one or two letter prefix used to identify a memory area in the PC. All memory
areas except the CIO area require prefixes to identify addresses in them.
ASCII
Short for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is used to
code characters for output to printers and other external devices.
asynchronous execution
Execution of programs and servicing operations in which program execution
and servicing are not synchronized with each other.
Auxiliary Area
A PC data area allocated to flags and control bits.
auxiliary bit
A bit in the Auxiliary Area.
Backplane
A base to which Units are mounted to form a Rack. Backplanes provide a series
of connectors for these Units along with buses to connect them to the CPU and
other Units and wiring to connect them to the Power Supply Unit. Backplanes
also provide connectors used to connect them to other Backplanes.
back-up
A copy made of existing data to ensure that the data will not be lost even if the
original data is corrupted or erased.
BASIC
A common programming language. BASIC Units are programmed in BASIC.
basic instruction
A fundamental instruction used in a ladder diagram. See advanced instruction.
177
Glossary
BASIC Unit
A CPU Bus Unit used to run programs in BASIC.
baud rate
The data transmission speed between two devices in a system measured in bits
per second.
BCD
Short for binary-coded decimal.
binary
A number system where all numbers are expressed in base 2, i.e., numbers are
written using only 0’s and 1’s. Each group of four binary bits is equivalent to one
hexadecimal digit. Binary data in memory is thus often expressed in hexadecimal for convenience.
binary-coded decimal
A system used to represent numbers so that every four binary bits is numerically
equivalent to one decimal digit.
bit
The smallest piece of information that can be represented on a computer. A bit
has the value of either zero or one, corresponding to the electrical signals ON
and OFF. A bit represents one binary digit. Some bits at particular addresses are
allocated to special purposes, such as holding the status of input from external
devices, while other bits are available for general use in programming.
bit address
The location in memory where a bit of data is stored. A bit address specifies the
data area and word that is being addressed as well as the number of the bit within the word.
branch line
A communications line leading from a Link Adapter to any Link Unit not designated as a terminator in a Link System. See main line.
buffer
A temporary storage space for data in a computerized device.
building-block PC
A PC that is constructed from individual components, or “building blocks.” With
building-block PCs, there is no one Unit that is independently identifiable as a
PC. The PC is rather a functional assembly of Units.
bus
A communications path used to pass data between any of the Units connected
to it.
bus link
A data link that passed data between two Units across a bus.
byte
A unit of data equivalent to 8 bits, i.e., half a word.
central processing unit
A device that is capable of storing programs and data, and executing the instructions contained in the programs. In a PC System, the central processing unit executes the program, processes I/O signals, communicates with external devices, etc.
channel
See word.
character code
A numeric (usually binary) code used to represent an alphanumeric character.
checksum
A sum transmitted with a data pack in communications. The checksum can be
recalculated from the received data to confirm that the data in the transmission
has not been corrupted.
CIO Area
A memory area used to control I/O and to store and manipulate data. CIO Area
addresses do not require prefixes.
communications cable
Cable used to transfer data between components of a control system and conforming to the RS-232C or RS-422 standards.
178
Glossary
constant
An input for an operand in which the actual numeric value is specified. Constants
can be input for certain operands in place of memory area addresses. Some operands must be input as constants.
control bit
A bit in a memory area that is set either through the program or via a Programming Device to achieve a specific purpose, e.g., a Restart Bit is turned ON and
OFF to restart a Unit.
control signal
A signal sent from the PC to effect the operation of the controlled system.
Control System
All of the hardware and software components used to control other devices. A
Control System includes the PC System, the PC programs, and all I/O devices
that are used to control or obtain feedback from the controlled system.
controlled system
The devices that are being controlled by a PC System.
Converting Link Adapter
A Link Adapter used to convert between different types of optical fiber cable, different types of wire cable, or between optical fiber cable and wire cable. Such
conversion is necessary to connect Units that use different forms of communication.
CPU
See central processing unit.
CPU Backplane
A Backplane used to create a CPU Rack.
CPU Bus Unit
A special Unit used with CV-series or CVM1/CVM1D PCs that mounts to the
CPU bus. This connection to the CPU bus enables special data links, data transfers, and processing.
CPU Rack
The main Rack in a building-block PC, the CPU Rack contains the CPU, a Power
Supply, and other Units. The CPU Rack, along with the Expansion CPU Rack,
provides both an I/O bus and a CPU bus.
crystal optical fiber cable
See AGF.
C-series PC
Any of the following PCs: C2000H, C1000H, C500, C200H, C40H, C28H, C20H,
C60K, C60P, C40K, C40P, C28K, C28P, C20K, C20P, C120, or C20.
CV Support Software
A programming package run on an IBM PC/AT or compatible to serve as a Programming Device for CV-series or CVM1/CVM1D PCs.
CV-series PC
Any of the following PCs: CV500, CV1000, or CV2000
CVSS
See CV Support Software.
cycle
One unit of processing performed by the CPU, including SFC/ladder program
execution, peripheral servicing, I/O refreshing, etc. The cycle is called the scan
with C-series PCs.
cycle time
The time required to complete one cycle of CPU processing.
data area
An area in the PC’s memory that is designed to hold a specific type of data.
data link
An automatic data transmission operation that allows PCs or Units within PC to
pass data back and forth via common data areas.
data register
A storage location in memory used to hold data. In CV-series or CVM1/CVM1D
PCs, data registers are used with or without index registers to hold data used in
indirect addressing.
179
Glossary
data transfer
Moving data from one memory location to another, either within the same device
or between different devices connected via a communications line or network.
debug
A process by which a draft program is corrected until it operates as intended.
Debugging includes both the removal of syntax errors, as well as the fine-tuning
of timing and coordination of control operations.
decimal
A number system where numbers are expressed to the base 10. In a PC all data
is ultimately stored in binary form, four binary bits are often used to represent
one decimal digit, via a system called binary-coded decimal.
decrement
Decreasing a numeric value, usually by 1.
default
A value automatically set by the PC when the user does not specifically set
another value. Many devices will assume such default conditions upon the application of power.
destination
The location where an instruction places the data on which it is operating, as opposed to the location from which data is taken for use in the instruction. The location from which data is taken is called the source.
digit
A unit of storage in memory that consists of four bits.
DIN track
A rail designed to fit into grooves on various devices to allow the devices to be
quickly and easily mounted to it.
DIP switch
Dual in-line package switch, an array of pins in a signal package that is mounted
to a circuit board and is used to set operating parameters.
distributed control
A automation concept in which control of each portion of an automated system is
located near the devices actually being controlled, i.e., control is decentralized
and ‘distributed’ over the system. Distributed control is a concept basic to PC
Systems.
DM Area
A data area used to hold only word data. Words in the DM area cannot be accessed bit by bit.
DM word
A word in the DM Area.
downloading
The process of transferring a program or data from a higher-level or host computer to a lower-level or slave computer. If a Programming Device is involved,
the Programming Device is considered the host computer.
Dummy I/O Unit
An I/O Unit that has no functional capabilities but that can be mounted to a slot on
a Rack so that words can be allocated to that slot. Dummy I/O Units can be used
to avoid changing operand addresses in programs by reserving words for a slot
for future use or by filling a slot vacated by a Unit to which words have already
been allocated.
duplex system
A system where a second CPU Unit and Power Supply Unit are ready to take
over control if the main Units fail.
EEPROM
Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM in which
stored data can be erased and reprogrammed. This is accomplished using a
special control lead connected to the EEPROM chip and can be done without
having to remove the EEPROM chip from the device in which it is mounted.
electrical noise
Random variations of one or more electrical characteristics such as voltage, current, and data, which might interfere with the normal operation of a device.
180
Glossary
EM Area
Extended Data Memory Area; an area that can be optionally added to certain
PCs to enable greater data storage. Functionally, the EM Area operates like the
DM Area. Area addresses are prefixes with E and only words can be accessed.
The EM Area is separated into multiple banks.
EM card
A card mounted inside certain PCs to added an EM Area.
EPROM
Erasable programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM in which stored data
can be erased, by ultraviolet light or other means, and reprogrammed.
error code
A numeric code generated to indicate that an error exists, and something about
the nature of the error. Some error codes are generated by the system; others
are defined in the program by the operator.
event processing
Processing that is performed in response to an event, e.g., an interrupt signal.
Expansion CPU Backplane
A Backplane used to create an Expansion CPU Rack.
Expansion CPU Rack
A Rack connected to the CPU Rack to increase the virtual size of the CPU Rack.
Units that may be mounted to the CPU Backplane may also be mounted to the
Expansion CPU Backplane.
Expansion Data Memory Unit A card mounted inside certain PCs to added an EM Area.
Expansion I/O Backplane
A Backplane used to create an Expansion I/O Rack.
Expansion I/O Rack
A Rack used to increase the I/O capacity of a PC. In CV-series or CVM1/CVM1D
PC, either one Expansion I/O Rack can be connected directly to the CPU or Expansion CPU Rack or multiple Expansion I/O Racks can be connected by using
an I/O Control and I/O Interface Units.
FA
Factory automation.
factory computer
A general-purpose computer, usually quite similar to a business computer, that
is used in automated factory control.
fatal error
An error that stops PC operation and requires correction before operation can
continue.
FINS
See CV-mode.
flag
A dedicated bit in memory that is set by the system to indicate some type of operating status. Some flags, such as the carry flag, can also be set by the operator
or via the program.
force reset
The process of forcibly turning OFF a bit via a programming device. Bits are usually turned OFF as a result of program execution.
force set
The process of forcibly turning ON a bit via a programming device. Bits are usually turned ON as a result of program execution.
frame checksum
The results of exclusive ORing all data within a specified calculation range. The
frame checksum can be calculated on both the sending and receiving end of a
data transfer to confirm that data was transmitted correctly.
GPC
An acronym for Graphic Programming Console.
Graphic Programming Console
A programming device with advanced programming and debugging capabilities
to facilitate PC operation. A Graphic Programming Console is provided with a
181
Glossary
large display onto which ladder-diagram programs can be written directly in ladder-diagram symbols for input into the PC without conversion to mnemonic
form.
hexadecimal
A number system where all numbers are expressed to the base 16. In a PC all
data is ultimately stored in binary form, however, displays and inputs on Programming Devices are often expressed in hexadecimal to simplify operation.
Each group of four binary bits is numerically equivalent to one hexadecimal digit.
host interface
An interface that allows communications with a host computer.
Host Link System
A system with one or more host computers connected to one or more PCs via
Host Link Units or host interfaces so that the host computer can be used to transfer data to and from the PC(s). Host Link Systems enable centralized management and control of PC Systems.
Host Link Unit
An interface used to connect a C-series PC to a host computer in a Host Link
System.
H-PCF cable
An acronym for hard plastic-clad optical fiber cable.
I/O allocation
The process by which the PC assigns certain bits in memory for various functions. This includes pairing I/O bits to I/O points on Units.
I/O Block
Either an Input Block or an Output Block. I/O Blocks provide mounting positions
for replaceable relays.
I/O Control Unit
A Unit mounted to the CPU Rack to monitor and control I/O points on Expansion
CPU Racks or Expansion I/O Racks.
I/O delay
The delay in time from when a signal is sent to an output to when the status of the
output is actually in effect or the delay in time from when the status of an input
changes until the signal indicating the change in the status is received.
I/O device
A device connected to the I/O terminals on I/O Units, Special I/O Units, etc. I/O
devices may be either part of the Control System, if they function to help control
other devices, or they may be part of the controlled system.
I/O Interface Unit
A Unit mounted to an Expansion CPU Rack or Expansion I/O Rack to interface
the Rack to the CPU Rack.
I/O point
The place at which an input signal enters the PC System, or at which an output
signal leaves the PC System. In physical terms, I/O points correspond to terminals or connector pins on a Unit; in terms of programming, an I/O points correspond to I/O bits in the IR area.
I/O refreshing
The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees
with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory
so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices.
I/O response time
The time required for an output signal to be sent from the PC in response to an
input signal received from an external device.
I/O Terminal
A Remote I/O Unit connected in a Wired Remote I/O System to provide a limited
number of I/O points at one location. There are several types of I/O Terminals.
I/O Unit
The most basic type of Unit mounted to a Backplane. I/O Units include Input
Units and Output Units, each of which is available in a range of specifications.
I/O Units do not include Special I/O Units, Link Units, etc.
182
Glossary
I/O verification error
A error generated by a disagreement between the Units registered in the I/O
table and the Units actually mounted to the PC.
I/O word
A word in the CIO area that is allocated to a Unit in the PC System and is used to
hold I/O status for that Unit.
IBM PC/AT or compatible
A computer that has similar architecture to, that is logically compatible with, and
that can run software designed for an IBM PC/AT computer.
initialize
Part of the startup process whereby some memory areas are cleared, system
setup is checked, and default values are set.
input
The signal coming from an external device into the PC. The term input is often
used abstractly or collectively to refer to incoming signals.
input bit
A bit in the CIO area that is allocated to hold the status of an input.
Input Block
A Unit used in combination with a Remote Interface to create an I/O Terminal. An
Input Block provides mounting positions for replaceable relays. Each relay can
be selected according to specific input requirements.
input device
An external device that sends signals into the PC System.
input point
The point at which an input enters the PC System. Input points correspond physically to terminals or connector pins.
input signal
A change in the status of a connection entering the PC. Generally an input signal
is said to exist when, for example, a connection point goes from low to high voltage or from a nonconductive to a conductive state.
Input Terminal
An I/O Terminal that provides input points.
instruction
A direction given in the program that tells the PC of the action to be carried out,
and the data to be used in carrying out the action. Instructions can be used to
simply turn a bit ON or OFF, or they can perform much more complex actions,
such as converting and/or transferring large blocks of data.
interface
An interface is the conceptual boundary between systems or devices and usually involves changes in the way the communicated data is represented. Interface
devices such as NSBs perform operations like changing the coding, format, or
speed of the data.
interrupt (signal)
A signal that stops normal program execution and causes a subroutine to be run
or other processing to take place.
Interrupt Input Unit
A Rack-mounting Unit used to input external interrupts into a PC System.
IOIF
An acronym for I/O Interface Unit.
IOM (Area)
A collective memory area containing all of the memory areas that can be accessed by bit, including timer and counter Completion Flags. The IOM Area includes all memory area memory addresses between 0000 and 0FFF.
JIS
An acronym for Japanese Industrial Standards.
jump
A type of programming where execution moves directly from one point in a program to another, without sequentially executing any instructions in between.
183
Glossary
Jumps in ladder diagrams are usually conditional on an execution condition;
jumps in SFC programs are conditional on the step status and transition condition status before the jump.
least-significant (bit/word)
See rightmost (bit/word).
LED
Acronym for light-emitting diode; a device used as for indicators or displays.
leftmost (bit/word)
The highest numbered bits of a group of bits, generally of an entire word, or the
highest numbered words of a group of words. These bits/words are often called
most-significant bits/words.
link
A hardware or software connection formed between two Units. “Link” can refer
either to a part of the physical connection between two Units or a software connection created to data existing at another location (i.e., data links).
Link Adapter
A Unit used to connect communications lines, either to branch the lines or to convert between different types of cable. There are two types of Link Adapter:
Branching Link Adapters and Converting Link Adapters.
Link System
A system used to connect remote I/O or to connect multiple PCs in a network.
Link Systems include the following: SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Systems, SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O Systems, SYSMAC LINK Systems, Host Link Systems,
and SYSMAC NET Link Systems.
Link Unit
Any of the Units used to connect a PC to a Link System. These include Remote
I/O Units, SYSMAC LINK Units, and SYSMAC NET Link Units.
linkable slot
A slot on either a Backplane to which a Link Unit can be mounted. Backplanes
differ in the slots to which Link Units can be mounted.
load
The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage
area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer. Also, an output
device connected to the PC is called a load.
main line
In a Link System connected through Branching Link Adapters, the communications cable that runs from the Unit at each end of the System through the Link
Adapters.
MCR Unit
Magnetic Card Reader Unit.
megabyte
A unit of storage equal to one million bytes.
memory area
Any of the areas in the PC used to hold data or programs.
most-significant (bit/word)
See leftmost (bit/word).
nesting
Programming one loop within another loop, programming a call to a subroutine
within another subroutine, or programming an IF–ELSE programming section
within another IF–ELSE section.
Network Service Board
A device with an interface to connect devices other than PCs to a SYSMAC NET
Link System.
Network Service Unit
A Unit that provides two interfaces to connect peripheral devices to a SYSMAC
NET Link System.
noise interference
Disturbances in signals caused by electrical noise.
184
Glossary
nonfatal error
A hardware or software error that produces a warning but does not stop the PC
from operating.
NOT
A logic operation which inverts the status of the operand. For example, AND
NOT indicates an AND operation with the opposite of the actual status of the operand bit.
octal
A number system where all numbers are expressed in base 8, i.e., numbers are
written using only numerals 0 through 7.
OFF
The status of an input or output when a signal is said not to be present. The OFF
state is generally represented by a low voltage or by non-conductivity, but can be
defined as the opposite of either.
OFF delay
The delay between the time when a signal is switched OFF (e.g., by an input
device or PC) and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an OFF
signal (i.e., as no signal) by a receiving party (e.g., output device or PC).
offset
A positive or negative value added to a base value such as an address to specify
a desired value.
ON
The status of an input or output when a signal is said to be present. The ON state
is generally represented by a high voltage or by conductivity, but can be defined
as the opposite of either.
ON delay
The delay between the time when an ON signal is initiated (e.g., by an input device or PC) and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an ON signal by a receiving party (e.g., output device or PC).
on-line removal
Removing a Rack-mounted Unit for replacement or maintenance during PC operation.
operand
The values designated as the data to be used for an instruction. An operand can
be input as a constant expressing the actual numeric value to be used or as an
address to express the location in memory of the data to be used.
operating error
An error that occurs during actual PC operation as opposed to an initialization
error, which occurs before actual operations can begin.
optical connector
A connector designed to be connected to an optical fiber cable.
optical fiber cable
Cable made from light conducting filaments used to transmit signals.
OR
A logic operation whereby the result is true if either of two premises is true, or if
both are true. In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually ON/OFF
states of bits or the logical combination of such states called execution conditions.
output
The signal sent from the PC to an external device. The term output is often used
abstractly or collectively to refer to outgoing signals.
Output Block
A Unit used in combination with a Remote Interface to create an I/O Terminal. An
Output Block provides mounting positions for replaceable relays. Each relay can
be selected according to specific output requirements.
output device
An external device that receives signals from the PC System.
output point
The point at which an output leaves the PC System. Output points correspond
physically to terminals or connector pins.
185
Glossary
output signal
A signal being sent to an external device. Generally an output signal is said to
exist when, for example, a connection point goes from low to high voltage or from
a nonconductive to a conductive state.
Output Terminal
An I/O Terminal that provides output points.
overflow
The state where the capacity of a data storage location has been exceeded.
overwrite
Changing the content of a memory location so that the previous content is lost.
parity
Adjustment of the number of ON bits in a word or other unit of data so that the
total is always an even number or always an odd number. Parity is generally
used to check the accuracy of data after being transmitted by confirming that the
number of ON bits is still even or still odd.
parity check
Checking parity to ensure that transmitted data has not been corrupted.
PC
An acronym for Programmable Controller.
PC configuration
The arrangement and interconnections of the Units that are put together to form
a functional PC.
PC System
With building-block PCs, all of the Racks and independent Units connected directly to them up to, but not including the I/O devices. The boundaries of a PC
System are the PC and the program in its CPU at the upper end; and the I/O
Units, Special I/O Units, Optical I/O Units, Remote Terminals, etc., at the lower
end.
PCB
An acronym for printed circuit board.
PCF
An acronym for plastic-clad optical fiber cable.
PC Setup
A group of operating parameters set in the PC from a Programming Device to
control PC operation.
Peripheral Device
Devices connected to a PC System to aid in system operation. Peripheral devices include printers, programming devices, external storage media, etc.
peripheral servicing
Processing signals to and from peripheral devices, including refreshing, communications processing, interrupts, etc.
PID Unit
A Unit designed for PID control.
port
A connector on a PC or computer that serves as a connection to an external device.
Power Supply Unit
A Unit that mounts to a Backplane in a Rack PC. It provides power at the voltage
required by the other Units on the Rack.
present value
The current value registered in a device at any instant during its operation. Present value is abbreviated as PV. The use of this term is generally restricted to timers and counters.
printed circuit board
A board onto which electrical circuits are printed for mounting into a computer or
electrical device.
Printer Interface Unit
A Unit used to interface a printer so that ladder diagrams and other data can be
printed out.
186
Glossary
Programmable Controller
A computerized device that can accept inputs from external devices and generate outputs to external devices according to a program held in memory. Programmable Controllers are used to automate control of external devices. Although single-unit Programmable Controllers are available, building-block Programmable Controllers are constructed from separate components. Such Programmable Controllers are formed only when enough of these separate components are assembled to form a functional assembly, i.e., there is no one individual Unit called a PC.
Programming Console
The simplest form or programming device available for a PC. Programming
Consoles are available both as hand-held models and as CPU-mounting models.
Programming Device
A Peripheral Device used to input a program into a PC or to alter or monitor a
program already held in the PC. There are dedicated programming devices,
such as Programming Consoles, and there are non-dedicated devices, such as
a host computer.
PROM
Programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM into which the program or
data may be written after manufacture, by a customer, but which is fixed from
that time on.
PROM Writer
A peripheral device used to write programs and other data into a ROM for permanent storage and application.
prompt
A message or symbol that appears on a display to request input from the operator.
protocol
The parameters and procedures that are standardized to enable two devices to
communicate or to enable a programmer or operator to communicate with a device.
PV
See present value.
Rack
An assembly that forms a functional unit in a Rack PC System. A Rack consists
of a Backplane and the Units mounted to it. These Units include the Power Supply, CPU, and I/O Units. Racks include CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, and
I/O Racks. The CPU Rack is the Rack with the CPU mounted to it. An Expansion
I/O Rack is an additional Rack that holds extra I/O Units. An I/O Rack is used in
the C2000H Duplex System, because there is no room for any I/O Units on the
CPU Rack in this System.
rack number
A number assigned to a Rack according to the order that it is connected to the
CPU Rack, with the CPU Rack generally being rack number 0.
Rack PC
A PC that is composed of Units mounted to one or more Racks. This configuration is the most flexible, and most large PCs are Rack PCs. A Rack PC is the
opposite of a Package-type PC, which has all of the basic I/O, storage, and control functions built into a single package.
RAM
Random access memory; a data storage media. RAM will not retain data when
power is disconnected.
RAS
An acronym for reliability, assurance, safety.
refresh
The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees
with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory
so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices.
187
Glossary
relay-based control
The forerunner of PCs. In relay-based control, groups of relays are interconnected to form control circuits. In a PC, these are replaced by programmable circuits.
reserved bit
A bit that is not available for user application.
reserved word
A word in memory that is reserved for a special purpose and cannot be accessed
by the user.
reset
The process of turning a bit or signal OFF or of changing the present value of a
timer or counter to its set value or to zero.
Restart Bit
A bit used to restart a Unit mounted to a PC.
restart continuation
A process which allows memory and program execution status to be maintained
so that PC operation can be restarted from the state it was in when operation
was stopped by a power interruption.
retrieve
The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage
area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer. Also, an output
device connected to the PC is called a load.
retry
The process whereby a device will re-transmit data which has resulted in an error message from the receiving device.
rightmost (bit/word)
The lowest numbered bits of a group of bits, generally of an entire word, or the
lowest numbered words of a group of words. These bits/words are often called
least-significant bits/words.
rising edge
The point where a signal actually changes from an OFF to an ON status.
ROM
Read only memory; a type of digital storage that cannot be written to. A ROM
chip is manufactured with its program or data already stored in it and can never
be changed. However, the program or data can be read as many times as desired.
RS-232C interface
An industry standard for serial communications.
RS-422 interface
An industry standard for serial communications.
scan
The process used to execute a ladder-diagram program. The program is examined sequentially from start to finish and each instruction is executed in turn
based on execution conditions. The scan also includes peripheral processing,
I/O refreshing, etc. The scan is called the cycle with CV-series or CVM1/CVM1D
PCs.
scan time
The time required for a single scan of a ladder-diagram program.
self diagnosis
A process whereby the system checks its own operation and generates a warning or error if an abnormality is discovered.
series
A wiring method in which Units are wired consecutively in a string. In Link Systems wired through Link Adapters, the Units are still functionally wired in series,
even though Units are placed on branch lines.
servicing
The process whereby the PC provides data to or receives data from external devices or remote I/O Units, or otherwise handles data transactions for Link Systems.
188
Glossary
set
The process of turning a bit or signal ON.
set value
The value from which a decrementing counter starts counting down or to which
an incrementing counter counts up (i.e., the maximum count), or the time from
which or for which a timer starts timing. Set value is abbreviated SV.
slot
A position on a Rack (Backplane) to which a Unit can be mounted.
software error
An error that originates in a software program.
software protect
A means of protecting data from being changed that uses software as opposed
to a physical switch or other hardware setting.
software switch
See memory switch.
Special I/O Unit
A Unit that is designed for a specific purpose. Special I/O Units include Position
Control Units, High-speed Counter Units, Analog I/O Units, etc.
SRAM
Static random access memory; a data storage media.
subroutine
A group of instructions placed separate from the main program and executed
only when called from the main program or activated by an interrupt.
SV
Abbreviation for set value.
switching capacity
The maximum voltage/current that a relay can safely switch on and off.
synchronous execution
Execution of programs and servicing operations in which program execution
and servicing are synchronized so that all servicing operations are executed
each time the programs are executed.
syntax
The form of a program statement (as opposed to its meaning). For example, the
two statements, LET A=B+B and LET A=B*2 use different syntaxes, but have
the same meaning.
syntax error
An error in the way in which a program is written. Syntax errors can include
‘spelling’ mistakes (i.e., a function code that does not exist), mistakes in specifying operands within acceptable parameters (e.g., specifying read-only bits as a
destination), and mistakes in actual application of instructions (e.g., a call to a
subroutine that does not exist).
system configuration
The arrangement in which Units in a System are connected. This term refers to
the conceptual arrangement and wiring together of all the devices needed to
comprise the System. In OMRON terminology, system configuration is used to
describe the arrangement and connection of the Units comprising a Control System that includes one or more PCs.
system error
An error generated by the system, as opposed to one resulting from execution of
an instruction designed to generate an error.
system error message
An error message generated by the system, as opposed to one resulting from
execution of an instruction designed to generate a message.
terminator
The code comprising an asterisk and a carriage return (* CR) which indicates the
end of a block of data in communications between devices. Frames within a multi-frame block are separated by delimiters. Also a Unit in a Link System designated as the last Unit on the communications line.
189
Glossary
timer
A location in memory accessed through a TC bit and used to time down from the
timer’s set value. Timers are turned ON and reset according to their execution
conditions.
TR Area
A data area used to store execution conditions so that they can be reloaded later
for use with other instructions.
TR bit
A bit in the TR Area.
transfer
The process of moving data from one location to another within the PC, or between the PC and external devices. When data is transferred, generally a copy
of the data is sent to the destination, i.e., the content of the source of the transfer
is not changed.
transmission distance
The distance that a signal can be transmitted.
UM area
The memory area used to hold the active program, i.e., the program that is being
currently executed.
Unit
In OMRON PC terminology, the word Unit is capitalized to indicate any product
sold for a PC System. Though most of the names of these products end with the
word Unit, not all do, e.g., a Remote Terminal is referred to in a collective sense
as a Unit. Context generally makes any limitations of this word clear.
unit address
A number used to control network communications. Unit addresses are computed for Units in various ways, e.g., 10 hex is added to the unit number to determine the unit address for a CPU Bus Unit.
unit number
A number assigned to some Link Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units to
facilitate identification when assigning words or other operating parameters.
uploading
The process of transferring a program or data from a lower-level or slave computer to a higher-level or host computer. If a Programming Devices is involved,
the Programming Device is considered the host computer.
watchdog timer
A timer within the system that ensures that the scan time stays within specified
limits. When limits are reached, either warnings are given or PC operation is
stopped depending on the particular limit that is reached.
WDT
See watchdog timer.
wire communications
A communications method in which signals are sent over wire cable. Although
noise resistance and transmission distance can sometimes be a problem with
wire communications, they are still the cheapest and the most common, and perfectly adequate for many applications.
word
A unit of data storage in memory that consists of 16 bits. All data areas consists
of words. Some data areas can be accessed only by words; others, by either
words or bits.
word address
The location in memory where a word of data is stored. A word address must
specify (sometimes by default) the data area and the number of the word that is
being addressed.
word allocation
The process of assigning I/O words and bits in memory to I/O Units and terminals in a PC System to create an I/O Table.
work area
A part of memory containing work words/bits.
190
Glossary
work bit
A bit in a work word.
work word
A word that can be used for data calculation or other manipulation in programming, i.e., a ‘work space’ in memory. A large portion of the IR area is always reserved for work words. Parts of other areas not required for special purposes
may also be used as work words.
write protect switch
A switch used to write-protect the contents of a storage device, e.g., a floppy
disk. If the hole on the upper left of a floppy disk is open, the information on this
floppy disk cannot be altered.
write-protect
A state in which the contents of a storage device can be read but cannot be altered.
191
Index
A–B
AC inputs,
alarm outputs,
All Plastic Optical-Fiber: APF,
ambient temperature,
ASCII,
CPU Units,
dimensions,
redundancy,
replacing,
setting for duplex system,
setting for simplex system,
current consumption,
I/O Units,
Link Units,
Slave Racks,
Special I/O Units,
assembly,
CV-series Expansion I/O Racks, system configuration,
assembly tool,
cycle time,
Backplanes
dimensions, ,
installation,
wiring,
DC Input/Transistor Output Unit,
bleeder resistors,
DC inputs,
D
DeviceNet,
C
C-series Expansion I/O Racks, system configuration,
cables
All Plastic Optical-Fiber: APF,
dimensions,
Hard-plastic-clad Quartz Fiber: H-PCF,
Plastic-clad Optical-Fiber: PCF,
communications
networks,
specifications,
dimensions
Backplanes, ,
cables,
Racks,
terminal blocks,
Units,
DIP switch,
display, I/O Interface Units,
Duplex Unit, ,
dimensions,
setting for duplex system,
setting for simplex system,
E–F
CompoBus/D System,
connecting, cables,
for CPU and I/O,
for Racks,
EC Directives, ,
EEPROM Cards,
EPROM, Cards,
connector, for Programming Device,
error messages,
control panel, installation,
Ethernet System,
control systems
See also system
overview,
execution cycle,
Controller Link System,
cooling fan,
CPU
battery replacement,
specifications,
Expansion CPU Racks. See Racks
Expansion Data Memory Unit,
dimensions,
mounting,
Expansion I/O Backplanes,
dimensions,
Expansion I/O Racks. See Racks
factory computers,
CPU Bus Units,
features,
CPU Racks. See Racks
fuses,
193
Index
G–I
grounding,
during PC installation,
problems,
Hard-plastic-clad Quartz Fiber: H-PCF,
Host Link System,
I/O
devices,
table, creating,
I/O Control Units,
dimensions,
O–P
online I/O Unit replacement, ,
operating modes,
optical connectors,
Optical Power Tester,
output devices,
PCs
block diagram,
control systems,
cooling,
input devices,
operating principle,
output devices,
role,
I/O Interface Units,
dimensions,
Plastic-Clad Optical-Fiber Cable: PCF,
I/O Units,
dimensions,
online replacement, ,
specifications,
Position Control Unit,
indicators,
for errors,
input devices,
clearance between Racks,
installation, environment,
interlock circuits,
Interrupt Input Units,
L–N
limit switches,
points per common,
power
cables,
consumption,
interruptions,
Power Supply Units,
block diagram,
current consumption,
dimensions,
errors,
grounding,
power, source,
redundancy, ,
replacing,
specifications,
terminals, ,
wiring, ,
precautions, general,
process control computers,
product lists,
Programmable Controllers. See PCs
limitations
mounting,
system,
Programming Devices,
manuals
CV-series,
related,
R
memory,
Memory Cards,
battery, replacement,
mounting,
removing,
models,
mounting, Racks
conduit,
limitations,
preventing noise,
programs, writing,
Racks
components,
connections,
specifications,
current consumption,
dimensions,
installation,
rack number switch,
rack numbers,
system configuration. See systems
wiring,
RAM Cards,
backup battery,
relays, replacing,
networks,
Remote I/O Systems,
noise,
Remote I/O Units,
194
Index
S
sensors
control systems,
photoelectric,
proximity,
servomotor,
simplified backup function,
Slave Racks. See Racks
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System,
SYSMAC LINK System,
SYSMAC NET Link System,
system configuration, ,
with C-series Expansion I/O Racks,
with CV-series Expansion I/O Racks,
with Expansion CPU Racks,
with Expansion I/O Racks,
system limitations,
system operation,
system startup,
solenoids,
control systems,
T–U
Special I/O Units,
specifications
AC Input Units,
AC/DC Input Units,
Contact Output Units,
CPU,
DC Input Units,
DC Input/Transistor Output Units,
Dummy I/O Units,
Dynamic DC Input Units,
fuses,
I/O Power Supply Units,
Power Supply Units,
timing,
Transistor Output Units,
Triac Output Units,
TTL Input Units,
TTL Output Units,
wiring dynamic inputs,
wiring dynamic outputs,
stepping motors,
control systems,
switches
control systems,
DIP. See DIP switch
limit switches,
pushbutton,
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O System,
SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote I/O System,
SYSMAC LINK System,
SYSMAC LINK Units,
SYSMAC NET Link System,
SYSMAC NET Link Units,
SYSMAC WAY,
systems
See also control systems
CompoBus/D System,
Controller Link System,
Ethernet System,
Host Link System,
Remote I/O Systems,
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O/System,
terminal blocks,
dimensions,
mounting screws,
terminals. See wiring
Terminating Resistance Units,
dimensions,
timing,
Unit replacement, online, ,
Units
See also specifications
compatible, , ,
dimensions,
W
weights,
wiring
AC Power Supply Units, power requirements,
DC inputs,
dynamic inputs,
dynamic outputs,
examples,
external,
I/O Units,
terminal blocks,
precautions
inductive load surge suppressor, ,
input leakage current,
interlock circuits,
output leakage current,
output short protection,
output surge current, ,
transistor output residual voltage,
voltage inputs,
terminals,
grounding,
I/O Units,
Output Units,
power supply,
RUN output,
START input,
195
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W350-E1-2
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
1
Date
January 1999
2
July 2000
Revised content
Original production
Pages xii and xiii: Safety precautions revised.
Page xiv: “Power Supply Unit” added at top of page.
Page 9: Corrected to “explicit messages” at bottom center of diagram.
Page 13: I/O Interface Unit added in to places.
Page 21: Model numbers corrected to “CV.”
Page 23: Addition at bottom of page.
Pages 24 and 25: Model numbers corrected.
Page 27: Tables entries corrected for SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Master.
Pages 37 and 109: Life corrected to “2 years”
Page 64: “Max.” removed at top of page.
Page 65: Note changed.
Page 69: New section added.
Page 73: “Maximum” removed above top diagram.
Pages 122 and 124: Information added on isolating Backplanes.
Page 135: Spacer added to Optional table.
Page 137: JIS specifications changed in top table and note change under top
table.
Page 156: Circuit configuration diagram corrected.
197
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement